1
                                                         (19 Sep 03)
 
                      ***********************************
                      *                                 *
                      * Section 4 - Further Information *
                      *                                 *
                      ***********************************
 
          This section of the manual contains both references, and
          hints on how to do things.  The following is a list of
          the topics covered:
 
             o  Computational References.
 
             o  Basis Set References, and descriptions.
 
             o  Spherical Harmonics.
 
             o  How to do RHF, ROHF, UHF, and GVB calculations.
                General considerations     Other open shell SCF cases
                Direct SCF                 True GVB perfect pairing
                Convergence accelerators   The special case of TCSCF
                High spin open shell SCF   A caution about symmetry
 
             o  How to do MCSCF and CI calculations.
                MCSCF implementation       CSF CI
                Orbital updates            starting orbitals
                CI coef optimization       references
                determinant CI
 
             o  Second order perturbation theory.
                RHF and UHF MP2            GVB based MP2
                high spin ROHF MP2         MCSCF based MP2

             o  Coupled-Cluster theory.
                Available computations     restarts
                resource requirements      references

             o  Density Functional Theory.
                DFTTYP keywords            DFT with grids
                grid-free DFT              references

             o  Geometry Searches and Internal Coordinates.
                Quasi-Newton searches      Practical matters
                The nuclear hessian        Saddle points
                Coordinate choices         Mode following
                The role of symmetry
 
             o  Intrinsic Reaction Coordinate (IRC) methods.

             o  Gradient Extremals.
 
1


             o  Continuum solvation methods: SCRF, PCM, and COSMO.

             o  Effective Fragment Potential method.
                Terms in an EFP              Current Limitations
                Constructing EFP1 or EFP2    Practical Hints
                QM/MM across covalent bonds  References

             o  MOPAC calculations within GAMESS.
 
             o  Molecular Properties, and conversion factors.
 
             o  Localization tips.
 
             o  Transition moments and spin-orbit coupling.
 




          For people who are newcomers to computational chemistry,
          it may be helpful to study an introductory book.  The
          volume by Frank Jensen is an outstanding survey of methods,
          basis sets, properties, and other topics.

          "Ab Initio Molecular Orbital Theory"
          W.J.Hehre, L.Radom, J.A.Pople, P.v.R.Schleyer
          Wiley and Sons, New York, 1986

          "Modern Quantum Chemistry"  (now a Dover paperback)
          A.Szabo, N.S.Ostlund  McGraw-Hill, 1989

          "Quantum Chemistry, 5th Edition"
          I.N.Levine    Prentice Hall, 1999

          "Introduction to Computational Chemistry"
          F.Jensen       Wiley and Sons, Chichester, 1999

          "Introduction to Quantum Mechanics in Chemistry"
          M.A.Ratner, G.C.Schatz    Prentice Hall, 2000

 
1
 
                          Computational References
                          ------------- ----------
 
          GAMESS - 
             M.W.Schmidt, K.K.Baldridge, J.A.Boatz, S.T.Elbert,
             M.S.Gordon, J.J.Jensen, S.Koseki, N.Matsunaga, 
             K.A.Nguyen, S.Su, T.L.Windus, M.Dupuis, J.A.Montgomery
             J.Comput.Chem. 14, 1347-1363 (1993)

          HONDO -
          These papers describes many of the algorithms in detail,
          and much of these applies also to GAMESS:
          "The General Atomic and Molecular Electronic Structure
             System: HONDO 7.0"  M.Dupuis, J.D.Watts, H.O.Villar,
             G.J.B.Hurst  Comput.Phys.Comm. 52, 415-425(1989)
          "HONDO: A General Atomic and Molecular Electronic
             Structure System"  M.Dupuis, P.Mougenot, J.D.Watts,
             G.J.B.Hurst, H.O.Villar in "MOTECC: Modern Techniques
             in Computational Chemistry"  E.Clementi, Ed.
             ESCOM, Leiden, the Netherlands, 1989, pp 307-361.
          "HONDO: A General Atomic and Molecular Electronic
             Structure System"  M.Dupuis, A.Farazdel, S.P.Karna,
             S.A.Maluendes in "MOTECC: Modern Techniques in
             Computational Chemistry"  E.Clementi, Ed.
             ESCOM, Leiden, the Netherlands, 1990, pp 277-342.
          M.Dupuis, S.Chin, A.Marquez in "Relativistic and Electron
          Correlation Effects in Molecules", G.Malli, Ed.  Plenum 
          Press, NY 1994, pp 315-338.

          sp integrals and gradient integrals -
          J.A.Pople, W.J.Hehre  J.Comput.Phys. 27, 161-168(1978)
          H.B.Schlegel, J.Chem.Phys.  77, 3676-3681(1982)
 
          spdfg integrals -
          "Numerical Integration Using Rys Polynomials"
              H.F.King and M.Dupuis   J.Comput.Phys. 21,144(1976)
          "Evaluation of Molecular Integrals over Gaussian
                                               Basis Functions"
             M.Dupuis,J.Rys,H.F.King  J.Chem.Phys. 65,111-116(1976)
          "Molecular Symmetry and Closed Shell HF Calculations"
           M.Dupuis and H.F.King   Int.J.Quantum Chem. 11,613(1977)
          "Computation of Electron Repulsion Integrals using
                     the Rys Quadrature Method"
              J.Rys,M.Dupuis,H.F.King J.Comput.Chem. 4,154-157(1983)
 
          spdfg gradient integrals -
          "Molecular Symmetry. II. Gradient of Electronic Energy
           with respect to Nuclear Coordinates"
              M.Dupuis and H.F.King  J.Chem.Phys. 68,3998(1978)
          although the implementation is much newer than this paper.
 
1
 
          spd hessian integrals -
          "Molecular Symmetry. III. Second derivatives of Electronic
           Energy with respect to Nuclear Coordinates"
              T.Takada, M.Dupuis, H.F.King
              J.Chem.Phys. 75, 332-336 (1981)

          Q matrix, and integral transformation symmetry -
          E.Hollauer, M.Dupuis  J.Chem.Phys. 96, 5220 (1992)
 
          spdfg effective core potentials (ECP) integrals -
          C.F.Melius, W.A.Goddard   Phys.Rev.A, 10,1528-1540(1974)
          L.R.Kahn, P.Baybutt, D.G.Truhlar
             J.Chem.Phys. 65, 3826-3853 (1976)
          M.Krauss, W.J.Stevens  Ann.Rev.Phys.Chem. 35, 357-385(1985)
          J.Breidung, W.Thiel, A.Komornicki  
             Chem.Phys.Lett. 153, 76-81(1988)
          B.M.Bode, M.S.Gordon  J.Chem.Phys.  111, 8778-8784(1999)
          See also the papers listed for SBKJC and HW basis sets.

          Quantum fast multipole method -
          E.O.Steinborn, K.Ruedenberg  Adv.Quantum Chem. 7, 1-81(1973)
          L.Greengard  "The Rapid Evaluation of Potential Fields in
                        Particle Systems" (MIT, Cambridge, 1987)
          C.H.Choi, J.Ivanic, M.S.Gordon, K.Ruedenberg
             J.Chem.Phys. 111, 8825-8831(1999)
          C.H.Choi, K.Ruedenberg, M.S.Gordon
             J.Comput.Chem. 22, 1484-1501(2001)

          RHF -
          C.C.J.Roothaan    Rev.Mod.Phys. 23, 69(1951)
 
          UHF -
          J.A.Pople, R.K.Nesbet  J.Chem.Phys 22, 571 (1954)
 
          high spin coupling ROHF -
          R.McWeeny, G.Diercksen J.Chem.Phys. 49,4852-4856(1968)
          M.F.Guest, V.R.Saunders, Mol.Phys. 28, 819-828(1974)
          J.S.Binkley, J.A.Pople, P.A.Dobosh
             Mol.Phys.  28, 1423-1429 (1974)
          E.R.Davidson  Chem.Phys.Lett.  21,565(1973)
          K.Faegri, R.Manne  Mol.Phys.  31,1037-1049(1976)
          H.Hsu, E.R.Davidson, and R.M.Pitzer
             J.Chem.Phys. 65,609(1976)

          GVB and low spin coupling ROHF -
          F.W.Bobrowicz and W.A.Goddard, in Modern Theoretical
          Chemistry, Vol 3, H.F.Schaefer III, Ed., Chapter 4.
 
          MCSCF - see reference list in the subsection below
 
1

          determinant CI (full CI (ALDET) and general CI (GENCI)) -
          J.Ivanic, K.Ruedenberg  Theoret.Chem.Acc. 106, 339-351(2001)

          determinant CI (occupationally restricted, ORMAS) -
          J.Ivanic  J.Chem.Phys.  to appear November 2003

          configuration state function CI (GUGA) -
          B.Brooks and H.F.Schaefer  J.Chem. Phys. 70,5092(1979)
          B.Brooks, W.Laidig, P.Saxe, N.Handy, and H.F.Schaefer,
             Physica Scripta 21, 312(1980).

          CIS energy and gradient -
          J.B.Foresman, M.Head-Gordon, J.A.Pople, M.J.Frisch
             J.Phys.Chem. 96, 135-149(1992)
          R.M.Shroll, W.D.Edwards
             Int.J.Quantum Chem. 63, 1037-1049(1997)

          closed and unrestricted open shell 2nd order Moller-Plesset -
          J.A.Pople, J.S.Binkley, R.Seeger
            Int. J. Quantum Chem. S10, 1-19(1976)
          M.J.Frisch, M.Head-Gordon, J.A.Pople,
            Chem.Phys.Lett. 166, 275-280(1990)
          G.D.Fletcher, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
            Adv.Chem.Phys. 110, 267-294(1999)
          C.M.Aikens, S.P.Webb, R.L.Bell, G.D.Fletcher, M.W.Schmidt,
            M.S.Gordon  Theoret.Chem.Acc., in press
 
          spin restricted open shell MP2, so called ZAPT method -
          T.J.Lee, D.Jayatilaka  Chem.Phys.Lett. 201, 1-10(1993)
          T.J.Lee, A.P.Rendell, K.G.Dyall, D.Jayatilaka
             J.Chem.Phys. 100, 7400-7409(1994)
 
          spin restricted open shell MP2, so called RMP method -
          P.J.Knowles, J.S.Andrews, R.D.Amos, N.C.Handy, J.A.Pople
             Chem.Phys.Lett. 186, 130-136 (1991)
          W.J.Lauderdale, J.F.Stanton, J.Gauss, J.D.Watts,
          R.J.Bartlett  Chem.Phys.Lett. 187, 21-28(1991)

          multiconfigurational quasidegenerate perturbation theory -
          H.Nakano, J.Chem.Phys. 99, 7983-7992(1993)

          Coupled-Cluster Program included in GAMESS -
          P. Piecuch, S.A. Kucharski, K. Kowalski, and M. Musial,
          Comput.Phys.Commun., 149, 71-96(2002)
          Any publication describing the results of coupled-cluster
          calculations obtained with GAMESS should give reference
          this paper.
 
1
 
          RHF/ROHF/TCSCF coupled perturbed Hartree Fock -
          "Single Configuration SCF Second Derivatives on a Cray"
              H.F.King, A.Komornicki in "Geometrical Derivatives of
              Energy Surfaces and Molecular Properties" P.Jorgensen
              J.Simons, Ed. D.Reidel, Dordrecht, 1986, pp 207-214.
          Y.Osamura, Y.Yamaguchi, D.J.Fox, M.A.Vincent, H.F.Schaefer
              J.Mol.Struct. 103, 183-186 (1983)
          M.Duran, Y.Yamaguchi, H.F.Schaefer
              J.Phys.Chem. 92, 3070-3075 (1988)
          "A New Dimension to Quantum Chemistry"  Y.Yamaguchi,
          Y.Osamura, J.D.Goddard, H.F.Schaefer  Oxford Press, NY 1994
 
          harmonic vibrational analysis in Cartesian coordinates -
          W.D.Gwinn  J.Chem.Phys.  55,477-481(1971)
 
          Normal coordinate decomposition analysis -
          J.A.Boatz and M.S.Gordon,
             J.Phys.Chem. 93, 1819-1826(1989).

          Partial Hessian vibrational analysis -
          H.Li, J.H.Jensen, Theoret.Chem.Acc. 107, 211-219(2002)
 
          Raman intensity -
          A.Komornicki, J.W.McIver  J.Chem.Phys. 70, 2014-2016(1979)
          G.B.Bacskay, S.Saebo, P.R.Taylor
             Chem.Phys. 90, 215-224(1984)

          anharmonic vibrational spectra (VSCF) -
          G.M.Chaban, J.O.Jung, R.B.Gerber
             J.Chem.Phys.  111, 1823-1829(1999)
          N.Matsunaga, G.M.Chaban, R.B.Gerber
             J.Chem.Phys. 117, 3541-3547(2002)
          R.B.Gerber, J.O.Jung in "Computational Molecular
             Spectroscopy" P.Jensen, P.R.Bunker, eds. Wiley and Sons,
             Chichester, 2000, pp 365-390.
          some applications of RUNTYP=VSCF:
          G.M.Chaban, J.O.Jung, R.B.Gerber
             J.Phys.Chem.A  104, 2772-2779(2000)
          J.Lundell, G.M.Chaban, R.B.Gerber
             Chem.Phys.Lett. 331, 308-316(2000)
          G.M.Chaban, R.B.Gerber, K.C.Janda
             J.Phys.Chem.A  105, 8323-8332(2001)
          A.T.Kowal, Spectrochimica Acta A 58, 1055-1067(2002)
          G.M.Chaban, S.S.Xantheas, R.B.Gerber
             J.Phys.Chem.A  107, 4952-4956(2003)

1

          Geometry optimization and saddle point location -
          J.Baker  J.Comput.Chem. 7, 385-395(1986).
          T.Helgaker  Chem.Phys.Lett. 182, 503-510(1991).
          P.Culot, G.Dive, V.H.Nguyen, J.M.Ghuysen
             Theoret.Chim.Acta  82, 189-205(1992).

          Dynamic Reaction Coordinate (DRC) -
          J.J.P.Stewart, L.P.Davis, L.W.Burggraf,
              J.Comput.Chem. 8, 1117-1123 (1987)
          S.A.Maluendes, M.Dupuis,  J.Chem.Phys. 93, 5902-5911(1990)
          T.Taketsugu, M.S.Gordon,  J.Phys.Chem. 99, 8462-8471(1995)
          T.Taketsugu, M.S.Gordon,  J.Phys.Chem. 99, 14597-604(1995)
          T.Taketsugu, M.S.Gordon,  J.Chem.Phys. 103, 10042-9(1995)
          M.S.Gordon, G.Chaban, T.Taketsugu
              J.Phys.Chem. 100, 11512-11525(1996)
          T.Takata, T.Taketsugu, K.Hirao, M.S.Gordon
              J.Chem.Phys. 109, 4281-4289(1998)

          Energy orbital localization -
          C.Edmiston, K.Ruedenberg  Rev.Mod.Phys.  35, 457-465(1963).
          R.C.Raffenetti, K.Ruedenberg, C.L.Janssen, H.F.Schaefer,
             Theoret.Chim.Acta 86, 149-165(1993)
 
          Boys orbital localization -
          S.F.Boys, "Quantum Science of Atoms, Molecules, and Solids"
          P.O.Lowdin, Ed, Academic Press, NY, 1966, pp 253-262.
 
          Population orbital localization -
          J.Pipek, P.Z.Mezey  J.Chem.Phys.  90, 4916(1989).

          Mulliken Population Analysis -
          R.S.Mulliken  J.Chem.Phys. 23, 1833-1840, 1841-1846, 
                                         2338-2342, 2343-2346(1955)

          so called "Lowdin Population Analysis" -
          This should be described as "a Mulliken population analysis
          (ref M1-M4 above) based on symmetrically orthogonalized
          orbitals (ref L)", where reference L is
             P.-O.Lowdin  Adv.Chem.Phys. 5, 185-199(1970)

          Bond orders and valences -
          M.Giambiagi, M.Giambiagi, D.R.Grempel, C.D.Heymann
              J.Chim.Phys. 72, 15-22(1975)
          I.Mayer, Chem.Phys.Lett., 97,270-274(1983), 117,396(1985).
          M.S.Giambiagi, M.Giambiagi, F.E.Jorge
              Z.Naturforsch. 39a, 1259-73(1984)
          I.Mayer, Theoret.Chim.Acta, 67,315-322(1985).
          I.Mayer, Int.J.Quantum Chem., 29,73-84(1986).
          I.Mayer, Int.J.Quantum Chem., 29,477-483(1986).
          The same formula (apart from a factor of two) may also be
          seen in equation 31 of the second of these papers (the bond
          order formula in the 1st of these is not the same formula):
          T.Okada, T.Fueno  Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan 48, 2025-2032(1975)
          T.Okada, T.Fueno  Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan 49, 1524-1530(1976)

1

          Direct SCF -
          J.Almlof, K.Faegri, K.Korsell
             J.Comput.Chem. 3, 385-399 (1982)
          M.Haser, R.Ahlrichs
             J.Comput.Chem. 10, 104-111 (1989)
 
          DIIS (Direct Inversion in the Iterative Subspace) -
          P.Pulay  J.Comput.Chem. 3, 556-560(1982)

          SOSCF -
          G.Chaban, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
             Theor.Chem.Acc.  97, 88-95(1997)
          T.H.Fischer, J.Almlof,  J.Phys.Chem.  96,9768-74(1992)

          Modified Virtual Orbitals (MVOs) -
          C.W.Bauschlicher, Jr.  J.Chem.Phys.  72,880-885(1980)
 
          EVVRSP in memory diagonalization -
          S.T.Elbert  Theoret.Chim.Acta  71,169-186(1987)
 
          Davidson eigenvector method -
          E.R.Davidson  J.Comput.Phys. 17,87(1975) and "Matrix
          Eigenvector Methods" p. 95 in "Methods in Computational
          Molecular Physics" ed. by G.H.F.Diercksen and S.Wilson

          RESC -
          T.Nakajima, K.Hirao  Chem.Phys.Lett. 302, 383-391(1999)
          T.Nakajima, T.Suzumura, K.Hirao
               Chem.Phys.Lett.  304, 271(1999)
          D.G.Fedorov, T.Nakajima, K.Hirao
               Chem.Phys.Lett. 335, 183-187(2001)

          NESC -
          K.G.Dyall  J.Comput.Chem.  23, 786-793(2002)
 
          MOPAC 6 -
          J.J.P.Stewart  J.Computer-Aided Molecular Design
          4, 1-105 (1990)
          References for parameters for individual atoms may be
          found on the printout from your runs.

          MacMolPlt -
          B.M.Bode, M.S.Gordon  J.Mol.Graphics Mod. 16, 133-138(1998)

1

          parallelization in GAMESS -
          for SCF, the main GAMESS paper quoted above.
          T.L.Windus, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon, 
              Chem.Phys.Lett., 216, 375-379(1993)
          T.L.Windus, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon, 
              Theoret.Chim.Acta  89, 77-88 (1994)
          T.L.Windus, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon, in "Parallel Computing
              in Computational Chemistry", ACS Symposium Series 592,
              Ed. by T.G.Mattson, ACS Washington, 1995, pp 16-28.
          K.K.Baldridge, M.S.Gordon, J.H.Jensen, N.Matsunaga, 
          M.W.Schmidt, T.L.Windus, J.A.Boatz, T.R.Cundari
              ibid, pp 29-46.
          G.D.Fletcher, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
              Adv.Chem.Phys. 110, 267-294 (1999)
          G.D.Fletcher, M.W.Schmidt, B.M.Bode, M.S.Gordon
              Comput.Phys.Commun. 128, 190-200 (2000)
          H.Umeda, S.Koseki, U.Nagashima, M.W.Schmidt
              J.Comput.Chem. 22, 1243-1251 (2001)

1
 
                           Basis Set References
                           ----- --- ----------
 
               An excellent review of the relationship between
          the atomic basis used, and the accuracy with which
          various molecular properties will be computed is:
          E.R.Davidson, D.Feller  Chem.Rev. 86, 681-696(1986).
 
          STO-NG      H-Ne        Ref. 1 and 2
                      Na-Ar,      Ref. 2 and 3 **
                      K,Ca,Ga-Kr  Ref. 4
                      Rb,Sr,In-Xe Ref. 5
                      Sc-Zn,Y-Cd  Ref. 6
 
          1) W.J.Hehre, R.F.Stewart, J.A.Pople
             J.Chem.Phys. 51, 2657-2664(1969).
          2) W.J.Hehre, R.Ditchfield, R.F.Stewart, J.A.Pople
             J.Chem.Phys. 52, 2769-2773(1970).
          3) M.S.Gordon, M.D.Bjorke, F.J.Marsh, M.S.Korth
             J.Am.Chem.Soc. 100, 2670-2678(1978).
             ** the valence scale factors for Na-Cl are taken
                from this paper, rather than the "official"
                Pople values in Ref. 2.
          4) W.J.Pietro, B.A.Levi, W.J.Hehre, R.F.Stewart,
             Inorg.Chem. 19, 2225-2229(1980).
          5) W.J.Pietro, E.S.Blurock, R.F.Hout,Jr., W.J.Hehre, D.J.
             DeFrees, R.F.Stewart  Inorg.Chem. 20, 3650-3654(1980).
          6) W.J.Pietro, W.J.Hehre J.Comput.Chem. 4, 241-251(1983).
 
 
 
          MINI/MIDI    H-Xe       Ref. 9
 
          9) "Gaussian Basis Sets for Molecular Calculations"
             S.Huzinaga, J.Andzelm, M.Klobukowski, E.Radzio-Andzelm,
             Y.Sakai, H.Tatewaki   Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1984.
 
              The MINI bases are three gaussian expansions of each
          atomic orbital.  The exponents and contraction
          coefficients are optimized for each element, and s and p
          exponents are not constrained to be equal.  As a result
          these bases give much lower energies than does STO-3G.
          The valence MINI orbitals of main group elements are
          scaled by factors optimized by John Deisz at North Dakota
          State University.  Transition metal MINI bases are not
          scaled.  The MIDI bases are derived from the MINI sets by
          floating the outermost primitive in each valence orbitals,
          and renormalizing the remaining 2 gaussians.  MIDI bases
          are not scaled by GAMESS.  The transition metal bases are
          taken from the lowest SCF terms in the s**1,d**n
          configurations.
 
1
 
          3-21G       H-Ne           Ref. 10     (also 6-21G)
                      Na-Ar          Ref. 11     (also 6-21G)
          K,Ca,Ga-Kr,Rb,Sr,In-Xe     Ref. 12
                      Sc-Zn          Ref. 13
                      Y-Cd           Ref. 14
 
          10) J.S.Binkley, J.A.Pople, W.J.Hehre
              J.Am.Chem.Soc. 102, 939-947(1980).
          11) M.S.Gordon, J.S.Binkley, J.A.Pople, W.J.Pietro,
              W.J.Hehre  J.Am.Chem.Soc. 104, 2797-2803(1982).
          12) K.D.Dobbs, W.J.Hehre  J.Comput.Chem. 7,359-378(1986)
          13) K.D.Dobbs, W.J.Hehre  J.Comput.Chem. 8,861-879(1987)
          14) K.D.Dobbs, W.J.Hehre  J.Comput.Chem. 8,880-893(1987)
 
 
 
          N-31G   references for  4-31G         5-31G        6-31G
                      H            15            15           15
                      He           23            23           23
                      Li           19,24                      19
                      Be           20,24                      20
                      B            17                         19
                      C-F          15            16           16
                      Ne           23                         23
                      Na-Al                                   22
                      Si                                      21 **
                      P-Cl         18                         22
                      Ar                                      22
                      K-Zn                                    25
 
          15) R.Ditchfield, W.J.Hehre, J.A.Pople
              J.Chem.Phys. 54, 724-728(1971).
          16) W.J.Hehre, R.Ditchfield, J.A.Pople
              J.Chem.Phys. 56, 2257-2261(1972).
          17) W.J.Hehre, J.A.Pople J.Chem.Phys. 56, 4233-4234(1972).
          18) W.J.Hehre, W.A.Lathan J.Chem.Phys. 56,5255-5257(1972).
          19) J.D.Dill, J.A.Pople J.Chem.Phys. 62, 2921-2923(1975).
          20) J.S.Binkley, J.A.Pople J.Chem.Phys. 66, 879-880(1977).
          21) M.S.Gordon  Chem.Phys.Lett. 76, 163-168(1980)
              ** - Note that the built in 6-31G basis for Si is
                   not that given by Pople in reference 22.
                   The Gordon basis gives a better wavefunction,
                   for a ROHF calculation in full atomic (Kh)
                   symmetry,
                   6-31G      Energy       virial
                   Gordon   -288.828573   1.999978
                   Pople    -288.828405   2.000280
                   See the input examples for how to run in Kh.
          22) M.M.Francl, W.J.Pietro, W.J.Hehre, J.S.Binkley,
              M.S.Gordon, D.J.DeFrees, J.A.Pople
              J.Chem.Phys. 77, 3654-3665(1982).
          23) Unpublished, copied out of GAUSSIAN82.
          24) For Li and Be, 4-31G is actually a 5-21G expansion.
          25) V.A.Rassolov, J.A.Pople, M.A.Ratner, T.L.Windus
                J.Chem.Phys. 109, 1223-1229(1998)
 
1
 
          Extended basis sets
 
          --> 6-311G

          28) R.Krishnan, J.S.Binkley, R.Seeger, J.A.Pople
              J.Chem.Phys. 72, 650-654(1980).
 
          --> valence double zeta "DZV" sets:
 
              "DH" basis - DZV for H, Li-Ne, Al-Ar
          30) T.H.Dunning, Jr., P.J.Hay  Chapter 1 in "Methods of
              Electronic Structure Theory", H.F.Shaefer III, Ed.
              Plenum Press, N.Y. 1977, pp 1-27.
              Note that GAMESS uses inner/outer scale factors of
              1.2 and 1.15 for DH's hydrogen (since at least 1983).
              To get Thom's usual basis, scaled 1.2 throughout:
                  HYDROGEN   1.0   x, y, z
                     DH  0  1.2   1.2
              DZV for K,Ca
          31) J.-P.Blaudeau, M.P.McGrath, L.A.Curtiss, L.Radom
              J.Chem.Phys. 107, 5016-5021(1997)
              "BC" basis - DZV for Ga-Kr
          32) R.C.Binning, Jr., L.A.Curtiss
              J.Comput.Chem. 11, 1206-1216(1990)
 
 
          --> valence triple zeta "TZV" sets:
 
              TZV for H,Li-Ne
          40) T.H. Dunning, J.Chem.Phys. 55 (1971) 716-723.
              TZV for Na-Ar - also known as the "MC" basis
          41) A.D.McLean, G.S.Chandler
              J.Chem.Phys. 72,5639-5648(1980).
              TZV for K,Ca
          42) A.J.H. Wachters, J.Chem.Phys. 52 (1970) 1033-1036.
              (see Table VI, Contraction 3).
              TZV for Sc-Zn (taken from HONDO 7)
          This is Wachters' (14s9p5d) basis (ref 42) contracted
          to (10s8p3d) with the following modifications
                 1. the most diffuse s removed;
                 2. additional s spanning 3s-4s region;
                 3. two additional p functions to describe the 4p;
                 4. (6d) contracted to (411) from ref 43,
                    except for Zn where Wachter's (5d)/[41]
                    and Hay's diffuse d are used.
          43) A.K. Rappe, T.A. Smedley, and W.A. Goddard III,
              J.Phys.Chem. 85 (1981) 2607-2611
 
1
 
 
          Valence only basis sets (for use with corresponding ECPs)
 
          SBKJC -31G splits, bigger for trans. metals (available Li-Rn)
          50) W.J.Stevens, H.Basch, M.Krauss
                  J.Chem.Phys. 81, 6026-6033 (1984)
          51) W.J.Stevens, M.Krauss, H.Basch, P.G.Jasien
                  Can.J.Chem. 70, 612-630 (1992)
          52) T.R.Cundari, W.J.Stevens  
                  J.Chem.Phys. 98, 5555-5565(1993)
 
          HW    -21 splits (sp exponents not shared)
              transition metals (not built in at present, although
              they will work if you type them in).
          53) P.J.Hay, W.R.Wadt  J.Chem.Phys.  82, 270-283 (1985)
              main group (available Na-Xe)
          54) W.R.Wadt, P.J.Hay  J.Chem.Phys.  82, 284-298 (1985)
              see also
          55) P.J.Hay, W.R.Wadt  J.Chem.Phys.  82, 299-310 (1985)
 
 
          Polarization exponents
 
              STO-NG*
          60) J.B.Collins, P. von R. Schleyer, J.S.Binkley,
              J.A.Pople  J.Chem.Phys. 64, 5142-5151(1976).
 
              3-21G*.   See also reference 12.
          61) W.J.Pietro, M.M.Francl, W.J.Hehre, D.J.DeFrees,  J.A.
              Pople, J.S.Binkley J.Am.Chem.Soc. 104,5039-5048(1982)
 
              6-31G* and 6-31G**.   See also reference 22 above.
          62) P.C.Hariharan, J.A.Pople
              Theoret.Chim.Acta 28, 213-222(1973)

              multiple polarization, and f functions
          63) M.J.Frisch, J.A.Pople, J.S.Binkley J.Chem.Phys.
              80, 3265-3269 (1984).
 
1
 
 
          STO-NG*  means d orbitals are used on third row atoms only.
                   The original paper (ref 60) suggested z=0.09 for
                   Na and Mg, and z=0.39 for Al-Cl.
                   At NDSU we prefer to use the same exponents as
                   in 3-21G* and 6-31G*, so we know we're looking
                   at changes in the sp basis, not the d exponent.
 
          3-21G*   means d orbitals on main group elements in the
                   third and higher periods.  Not defined for the
                   transition metals, where there are p's already
                   in the basis.  Except for alkalis and alkali
                   earths, the 4th and 5th row zetas are from
                   Huzinaga, et al (ref 9).  The exponents are
                   normally the same as for 6-31G*.
 
          6-31G*   means d orbitals on second and third row atoms.
                   We use Mark Gordon's z=0.395 for silicon, as well
                   as his fully optimized sp basis (ref 21). 
                   This is often written 6-31G(d) today.
                   For the first row transition metals, the *
                   means an f function is added.
 
          6-31G**  means the same as 6-31G*, except that p functions
                   are added on hydrogens.
                   This is often written 6-31G(d,p) today.
 
          6-311G** means p orbitals on H, and d orbitals elsewhere.
                   The exponents were derived from correlated atomic
                   states, and so are considerably tighter than the
                   polarizing functions used in 6-31G**, etc.
                   This is often written 6-311G(d,p) today.
 
              The definitions for 6-31G* for C-F are disturbing in
          that they treat these atoms the same.  Dunning and Hay
          (ref 30) have recommended a better set of exponents for
          second row atoms and a slightly different value for H.
 
              2p, 3p, 2d, 3p polarization sets are usually thought
          of as arising from applying splitting factors to the
          1p and 1d values.  For example, SPLIT2=2.0, 0.5 means
          to double and halve the single value.  The default
          values for SPLIT2 and SPLIT3 are taken from reference
          63, and were derived with correlation in mind.  The
          SPLIT2 values often produce a higher (!) HF energy than
          the singly polarized run, because the exponents are
          split too widely.  SPLIT2=0.4,1.4 will always lower the
          SCF energy (the values are the unpublished personal
          preference of MWS), and for SPLIT3 we might suggest
          3.0,1.0,1/3.
 
              With all this as background, we are ready to present
          the table of polarization exponents built into GAMESS.
 
1
 
              Built in polarization exponents, chosen by POLAR=
          in the $BASIS group.  The values are for d functions
          unless otherwise indicated.
 
              Please note that the names associated with each
          column are only generally descriptive.  For example, the
          column marked "Pople" contains a value for Si with which
          John Pople would not agree, and the Ga-Kr values in this
          column are actually from the Huzinaga "green book".  The
          exponents for K-Kr under "Dunning" are from Curtiss, et
          al., not Thom Dunning.  And so on.
 
                 POPLE    POPN311   DUNNING   HUZINAGA    HONDO7
                 ------   -------   -------   --------    ------
            H    1.1(p)    0.75(p)   1.0(p)     1.0(p)    1.0(p)
            He   1.1(p)    0.75(p)   1.0(p)     1.0(p)    1.0(p)
 
            Li   0.2       0.200                0.076(p)
            Be   0.4       0.255                0.164(p)  0.32
            B    0.6       0.401     0.70       0.388     0.50
            C    0.8       0.626     0.75       0.600     0.72
            N    0.8       0.913     0.80       0.864     0.98
            O    0.8       1.292     0.85       1.154     1.28
            F    0.8       1.750     0.90       1.496     1.62
            Ne   0.8       2.304     1.00       1.888     2.00
 
            Na   0.175                          0.061(p)  0.157
            Mg   0.175                          0.101(p)  0.234
            Al   0.325                          0.198     0.311
            Si   0.395                          0.262     0.388
            P    0.55                           0.340     0.465
            S    0.65                           0.421     0.542
            Cl   0.75                           0.514     0.619
            Ar   0.85                           0.617     0.696
 
            K    0.2                 0.260      0.039(p)
            Ca   0.2                 0.229      0.059(p)
          Sc-Zn  0.8(f)     N/A       N/A        N/A       N/A
            Ga   0.207               0.141
            Ge   0.246               0.202
            As   0.293               0.273
            Se   0.338               0.315
            Br   0.389               0.338
            Kr   0.443               0.318
 
            Rb   0.11                           0.034(p)
            Sr   0.11                           0.048(p)
 
          A blank means the value equals the "Pople" column.
 
          Common d polarization for all sets ("green book"):
              In     Sn     Sb     Te      I     Xe
            0.160  0.183  0.211  0.237  0.266  0.297
              Tl     Pb     Bi     Po     At     Rn
            0.146  0.164  0.185  0.204  0.225  0.247
 
1

          f polarization functions, from reference 63:
              Li    Be    B     C     N     O     F     Ne
            0.15  0.26  0.50  0.80  1.00  1.40  1.85  2.50
              Na    Mg    Al    Si    P     S     Cl    Ar
            0.15  0.20  0.25  0.32  0.45  0.55  0.70    --
 
 
          Anion diffuse functions
 
              3-21+G, 3-21++G, etc.
          70) T.Clark, J.Chandrasekhar, G.W.Spitznagel, P. von R.
              Schleyer J.Comput.Chem. 4, 294-301(1983)
          71) G.W.Spitznagel, Diplomarbeit, Erlangen, 1982.
 
              Anions usually require diffuse basis functions to
          properly represent their spatial diffuseness.  The use of
          diffuse sp shells on atoms in the second and third rows is
          denoted by a + sign, also adding diffuse s functions on
          hydrogen is symbolized by ++.  These designations can be
          applied to any of the Pople bases, e.g.  3-21+G, 3-21+G*,
          6-31++G**.  The following exponents are for L shells,
          except for H.  For H-F, they are taken from ref 70.  For
          Na-Cl, they are taken directly from reference 71.  These
          values may be found in footnote 13 of reference 63.
          For Ga-Br, In-I, and Tl-At these were optimized for the
          atomic ground state anion, using ROHF with a flexible ECP
          basis set, by Ted Packwood at NDSU.
 
              H
           0.0360
             Li      Be       B       C       N       O       F
           0.0074  0.0207  0.0315  0.0438  0.0639  0.0845  0.1076
             Na      Mg      Al      Si       P       S      Cl
           0.0076  0.0146  0.0318  0.0331  0.0348  0.0405  0.0483
                             Ga      Ge      As      Se      Br
                           0.0205  0.0222  0.0287  0.0318  0.0376
                             In      Sn      Sb      Te       I
                           0.0223  0.0231  0.0259  0.0306  0.0368
                             Tl      Pb      Bi      Po      At
                           0.0170  0.0171  0.0215  0.0230  0.0294
 
          Additional information about diffuse functions and also
          Rydberg type exponents can be found in reference 30.
 
1
 
              The following atomic energies are from UHF
          calculations (RHF on 1-S states), with p orbitals not
          symmetry equivalenced, and using the default molecular
          scale factors.  They should be useful in picking a basis
          of the desired energy accuracy, and estimating the correct
          molecular total energies.
 
 
          Atom state   STO-2G        STO-3G       3-21G       6-31G
          H   2-S     -.454397     -.466582     -.496199    -.498233
          He  1-S    -2.702157    -2.807784    -2.835680   -2.855160
          Li  2-S    -7.070809    -7.315526    -7.381513   -7.431236
          Be  1-S   -13.890237   -14.351880   -14.486820  -14.566764
          B   2-P   -23.395284   -24.148989   -24.389762  -24.519492
          C   3-P   -36.060274   -37.198393   -37.481070  -37.677837
          N   4-S   -53.093007   -53.719010   -54.105390  -54.385008
          O   3-P   -71.572305   -73.804150   -74.393657  -74.780310
          F   2-P   -95.015084   -97.986505   -98.845009  -99.360860
          Ne  1-S  -122.360485  -126.132546  -127.803825 -128.473877
          Na  2-S  -155.170019  -159.797148  -160.854065 -161.841425
          Mg  1-S  -191.507082  -197.185978  -198.468103 -199.595219
          Al  2-P  -233.199965  -239.026471  -240.551046 -241.854186
          Si  3-P  -277.506857  -285.563052  -287.344431 -288.828598
          P   4-S  -327.564244  -336.944863  -339.000079 -340.689008
          S   3-P  -382.375012  -393.178951  -395.551336 -397.471414
          Cl  2-P  -442.206260  -454.546015  -457.276552 -459.442939
          Ar  1-S  -507.249273  -521.222881  -524.342962 -526.772151
 
 
 
                                                           SCF   *
          Atom state     DH       6-311G        MC         limit
          H   2-S    -.498189     -.499810      --        -0.5
          He  1-S      --        -2.859895      --        -2.861680
          Li  2-S   -7.431736    -7.432026      --        -7.432727
          Be  1-S  -14.570907   -14.571874      --       -14.573023
          B   2-P  -24.526601   -24.527020      --       -24.529061
          C   3-P  -37.685571   -37.686024      --       -37.688619
          N   4-S  -54.397260   -54.397980      --       -54.400935
          O   3-P  -74.802707   -74.802496      --       -74.809400
          F   2-P  -99.395013   -99.394158      --       -99.409353
          Ne  1-S -128.522354  -128.522553      --      -128.547104
          Na  2-S      --           --     -161.845587  -161.858917
          Mg  1-S      --           --     -199.606558  -199.614636
          Al  2-P -241.855079       --     -241.870014  -241.876699
          Si  3-P -288.829617       --     -288.847782  -288.854380
          P   4-S -340.689043       --     -340.711346  -340.718798
          S   3-P -397.468667       --     -397.498023  -397.504910
          Cl  2-P -459.435938       --     -459.473412  -459.482088
          Ar  1-S      --           --     -526.806626  -526.817528
 
          * M.W.Schmidt and K.Ruedenberg, J.Chem.Phys. 71,
            3951-3962(1979). These are ROHF energies in Kh symmetry.
 
1
                              Spherical Harmonics
                              --------- ---------
          
              The implementation of ISPHER in $CONTRL does not rely
          on using a spherical harmonic basis set, in fact the atomic
          basis remains the Cartesian Gaussians.  Instead, certain
          MOs formed from particular combinations of the Cartesian
          Gaussians (for example, xx+yy+zz) are deleted from the MO
          space.  Thus a run with ISPHER=1 will have fewer MOs than
          AOs.  Since neither the occupied nor virtual MOs contain
          any admixture of xx+yy+zz, the resulting energy and wave-
          function is exactly equivalent to the use of a spherical
          harmonic basis.
          
              The log file output will contain expansions of each MO
          in terms of 6 d's, 10 f's, and 15 g's, and the $VEC also
          contains the same expansion over Cartesian Gaussians.  Both
          the matrix in your log file and in $VEC will contain fewer
          MOs than AOs, the exact number of MOs used is printed in
          the initial guess section of the log file.  It should be
          possible to read such $VEC groups into runs with different
          settings of ISPHER, should you choose to do so.
          
              The advantage of this approach is that intelligence in
          the generation of symmetry orbitals combined with the
          capability to drop linearly dependent MO combinations means
          that the details of ISPHER are located only in the orbital
          optimization code, where the variational spaces are simply
          reduced in size to eliminate the undesired contaminant
          functions.  This means that none of the integral routines
          need be modified, as the atomic basis remains the Cartesian
          Gaussians.  The disadvantage is that AO integral files run
          over the Cartesian Gaussians, and thus are not reduced in
          size.  Of course transformed MO integrals and various
          computations in correlated calculations are reduced in
          size, since the number of MOs may be greatly reduced.

              Computationally, the advantages of ISPHER=1 are not
          limited to the reduced CPU time associated with fewer total
          MOs.  Questions about d orbital participation as measured
          by Mulliken populations are cleanly addressed when the d's
          usage in the MOs does not contain any contamination from
          the s shape xx+yy+zz.  Less obviously, the use of spherical
          harmonics frequently greatly reduces problems with linear
          dependency, that exhibit as poor SCF convergence.

1
 
               How to do RHF, ROHF, UHF, and GVB calculations
               --- -- -- ---  ----  ---  --- --- ------------
 
                      * * * General considerations * * *
 
              These four SCF wavefunctions are all based on Fock
          operator techniques, even though some GVB runs use more
          than one determinant.  Thus all of these have an intrinsic
          N**4 time dependence, because they are all driven by
          integrals in the AO basis.  This similarity makes it
          convenient to discuss them all together.  In this section
          we will use the term HF to refer generically to any of
          these four wavefunctions, including the multi-determinate
          GVB-PP functions.  $SCF is the main input group for all
          these HF wavefunctions.
 
              As will be discussed below, in GAMESS the term ROHF
          refers to high spin open shell SCF only, but other open
          shell coupling cases are possible using the GVB code.
 
              Analytic gradients are implemented for every possible
          HF type calculation possible in GAMESS, and therefore
          numerical hessians are available for each.
 
              Analytic hessian calculation is implemented for RHF,
          ROHF, and any GVB case with NPAIR=0 or NPAIR=1.  Analytic
          hessians are more accurate, and much more quickly computed
          than numerical hessians, but require additional disk
          storage to perform an integral transformation, and also
          more physical memory.
 
              The second order Moller-Plesset energy correction
          (MP2) is implemented for RHF, UHF, ROHF, and MCSCF wave
          functions.  Analytic gradients may be obtained for MP2
          with RHF or UHF reference wavefunctions, and MP2 level
          properties are therefore available only for these two,
          see MP2PRP in $MP2.  All other cases give properties for
          the SCF function.
 
              Direct SCF is implemented for every possible HF type
          calculation.  The direct SCF method may not be used with 
          DEM convergence.  Direct SCF may be used during energy,
          gradient, numerical or analytic hessian, CI or MP2 energy
          correction, or localized orbitals computations.
 
1
 
                          * * * direct SCF * * *
 
              Normally, HF calculations proceed by evaluating a
          large number of two electron repulsion integrals, and
          storing these on a disk.  This integral file is read back
          in during each HF iteration to form the appropriate Fock
          operators.  In a direct HF, the integrals are not stored
          on disk, but are instead reevaluated during each HF
          iteration.  Since the direct approach *always* requires
          more CPU time, the default for DIRSCF in $SCF is .FALSE.
 
              Even though direct SCF is slower, there are at least
          three reasons why you may want to consider using it.  The
          first is that it may not be possible to store all of the
          integrals on the disk drives attached to your computer.
          Secondly, the index label packing scheme used by GAMESS
          restricts the basis set size to no more than 361 if the
          integrals are stored on disk, whereas for direct HF you
          can (in principle) use up to 2047 basis functions.
          Finally, what you are really interested in is reducing the
          wall clock time to obtain your answer, not the CPU time.
          Workstations have modest hardware (and sometimes software)
          I/O capabilities.  Other environments such as an IBM
          mainframe shared by many users may also have very poor
          CPU/wall clock performance for I/O bound jobs such as
          conventional HF.
 
              You can estimate the disk storage requirements for
          conventional HF using a P or PK file by the following
          formulae:
 
                    nint = 1/sigma * 1/8 * N**4
                    Mbytes = nint * x / 1024**2
 
          Here N is the total number of basis functions in your
          run, which you can learn from an EXETYP=CHECK run.  The
          1/8 accounts for permutational symmetry within the
          integrals.  Sigma accounts for the point group symmetry,
          and is difficult to estimate accurately.  Sigma cannot be
          smaller than 1, in no symmetry (C1) calculations.  For
          benzene, sigma would be almost six, since you generate 6
          C's and 6 H's by entering only 1 of each in $DATA.  For
          water sigma is not much larger than one, since most of the
          basis set is on the unique oxygen, and the C2v symmetry
          applies only to the H atoms.  The factor x is 12 bytes per
          integral for basis sets smaller than 255, and 16 otherwise.
          Finally, since integrals that are very close to zero need
          not be stored on disk, the actual power dependence is not
          as bad as N**4, and in fact in the limit of very large
          molecules can be as low as N**2.  Thus plugging in sigma=1
          should give you an upper bound to the actual disk space
          needed.  If the estimate exceeds your available disk
          storage, your only recourse is direct HF.
 
1
 
              What are the economics of direct HF?  Naively, if we
          assume the run takes 10 iterations to converge, we must
          spend 10 times more CPU time doing the integrals on each
          iteration.  However, we do not have to waste any CPU time
          reading blocks of integrals from disk, or in unpacking
          their indices.  We also do not have to waste any wall
          clock time waiting for a relatively slow mechanical device
          such as a disk to give us our data.
 
              There are some less obvious savings too, as first
          noted by Almlof.  First, since the density matrix is known
          while we are computing integrals, we can use the Schwarz
          inequality to avoid doing some of the integrals.  In a
          conventional SCF this inequality is used to avoid doing
          small integrals.  In a direct SCF it can be used to avoid
          doing integrals whose contribution to the Fock matrix is
          small (density times integral=small).  Secondly, we can
          form the Fock matrix by calculating only its change since
          the previous iteration.  The contributions to the change
          in the Fock matrix are equal to the change in the density
          times the integrals.  Since the change in the density goes
          to zero as the run converges, we can use the Schwarz
          screening to avoid more and more integrals as the
          calculation progresses.  The input option FDIFF in $SCF
          selects formation of the Fock operator by computing only
          its change from iteration to iteration.  The FDIFF option
          is not implemented for GVB since there are too many density
          matrices from the previous iteration to store, but is the
          default for direct RHF, ROHF, and UHF.
 
              So, in our hypothetical 10 iteration case, we do not
          spend as much as 10 times more time in integral
          evaluation.  Additionally, the run as a whole will not
          slow down by whatever factor the integral time is
          increased.  A direct run spends no additional time summing
          integrals into the Fock operators, and no additional time
          in the Fock diagonalizations.  So, generally speaking, a
          RHF run with 10-15 iterations will slow down by a factor
          of 2-4 times when run in direct mode.  The energy gradient
          time is unchanged by direct HF, and this is a large time
          compared to HF energy, so geometry optimizations will be
          slowed down even less.  This is really the converse of
          Amdahl's law:  if you slow down only one portion of a
          program by a large amount, the entire program slows down
          by a much smaller factor.
 
              To make this concrete, here are some times for GAMESS
          for a job which is a RHF energy for a SbC4O2NH4.  These
          timings were obtained an extremely long time ago, on a
          DECstation 3100 under Ultrix 3.1, which was running only
 
1
 
          these tests, so that the wall clock times are meaningful.
          This system is typical of Unix workstations in that it
          uses SCSI disks, and the operating system is not terribly
          good at disk I/O.  By default GAMESS stores the integrals
          on disk in the form of a P supermatrix, because this will
          save time later in the SCF cycles.  By choosing NOPK=1 in
          $INTGRL, an ordinary integral file can be used, which
          typically contains many fewer integrals, but takes more
          CPU time in the SCF.  Because the DECstation is not
          terribly good at I/O, the wall clock time for the ordinary
          integral file is actually less than when the supermatrix
          is used, even though the CPU time is longer.  The run
          takes 13 iterations to converge, the times are in seconds.
 
                                     P supermatrix   ordinary file
             # nonzero integrals      8,244,129       6,125,653
             # blocks skipped            55,841          55,841
             CPU time (ints)              709              636
             CPU time (SCF)              1289             1472
             CPU time (job total)        2123             2233
             wall time (job total)       3468             3200
 
              When the same calculation is run in direct mode
          (integrals are processed like an ordinary integral disk
          file when running direct),
 
                iteration 1:         FDIFF=.TRUE.   FDIFF=.FALSE.
             # nonzero integrals       6,117,416      6,117,416
             # blocks skipped             60,208         60,208
                iteration 13:
             # nonzero integrals       3,709,733      6,122,912
             # blocks skipped            105,278         59,415
             CPU time (job total)         6719            7851
             wall time (job total)        6764            7886
 
              Note that elimination of the disk I/O dramatically
          increases the CPU/wall efficiency.  Here's the bottom line
          on direct HF:
 
                best direct CPU / best disk CPU = 6719/2123 = 3.2
                best direct wall/ best disk wall= 6764/3200 = 2.1
 
          Direct SCF is slower than conventional SCF, but not
          outrageously so!  From the data in the tables, we can see
          that the best direct method spends about 6719-1472 = 5247
          seconds doing integrals.  This is an increase of about
          5247/636 = 8.2 in the time spent doing integrals, in a run
          which does 13 iterations (13 times evaluating integrals).
          8.2 is less than 13 because the run avoids all CPU charges 
          related to I/O, and makes efficient use of the Schwarz 
          inequality to avoid doing many of the integrals in its 
          final iterations.
 
1
 
                    * * * convergence accelerators * * *
 
              Generally speaking, the simpler the HF function, the
          better its convergence.  In our experience, the majority
          of RHF and ROHF runs converge readily from GUESS=HUCKEL.
          UHF often takes considerably more iterations than either
          of these, due to the common occurence of heavy spin
          contamination.  GVB runs typically require GUESS=MOREAD,
          although the Huckel guess usually works for NPAIR=0.  
          GVB cases with NPAIR greater than one are particularly
          difficult.
 
              Unfortunately, not all HF runs converge readily.  The
          best way to improve your convergence is to provide better
          starting orbitals!  In many cases, this means to MOREAD
          orbitals from some simpler HF case.  For example, if you
          want to do a doublet ROHF, and the HUCKEL guess does not
          seem to converge, do this:  Do an RHF on the +1 cation.
          RHF is typically more stable than ROHF, UHF, or GVB, and
          cations are usually readily convergent.  Then MOREAD the
          cation's orbitals into the neutral calculation which you
          wanted to do at first.
 
              GUESS=HUCKEL does not always guess the correct
          electronic configuration.  It may be useful to use PRTMO
          in $GUESS during a CHECK run to examine the starting
          orbitals, and then reorder them with NORDER if that seems
          appropriate.
 
              Of course, by default GAMESS uses the convergence
          procedures which are usually most effective.  Still, there
          are cases which are difficult, so the $SCF group permits
          you to select several alternative methods for improving
          convergence.  Briefly, these are
 
              EXTRAP.  This extrapolates the three previous Fock
          matrices, in an attempt to jump ahead a bit faster.  This
          is the most powerful of the old-fashioned accelerators,
          and normally should be used at the beginning of any SCF
          run.  When an extrapolation occurs, the counter at the
          left of the SCF printout is set to zero.
 
              DAMP.  This damps the oscillations between several
          successive Fock matrices.  It may help when the energy is
          seen to oscillate wildly.  Thinking about which orbitals
          should be occupied initially may be an even better way to
          avoid oscillatory behaviour.
 
1
 
              SHIFT.  This shifts the diagonal elements of the virtual
          part of the Fock matrix up, in an attempt to uncouple the
          unoccupied orbitals from the occupied ones.  At convergence,
          this has no effect on the orbitals, just their orbital
          energies, but will produce different (and hopefully better)
          orbitals during the iterations.
 
              RSTRCT.  This limits mixing of the occupied orbitals
          with the empty ones, especially the flipping of the HOMO
          and LUMO to produce undesired electronic configurations or
          states.  This should be used with caution, as it makes it
          very easy to converge on incorrect electronic configurations,
          especially if DIIS is also used.  If you use this, be sure 
          to check your final orbital energies to see if they are 
          sensible.  A lower energy for an unoccupied orbital than 
          for one of the occupied ones is a sure sign of problems.
 
              DIIS.  Direct Inversion in the Iterative Subspace is
          a modern method, due to Pulay, using stored error and Fock
          matrices from a large number of previous iterations to
          interpolate an improved Fock matrix.  This method was
          developed to improve the convergence at the final stages
          of the SCF process, but turns out to be quite powerful at
          forcing convergence in the initial stages of SCF as well.
          By giving ETHRSH as 10.0 in $SCF, you can practically
          guarantee that DIIS will be in effect from the first
          iteration.  The default is set up to do a few iterations
          with conventional methods (extrapolation) before engaging
          DIIS.  This is because DIIS can sometimes converge to
          solutions of the SCF equations that do not have the lowest
          possible energy.  For example, the 3-A-2 small angle state
          of SiLi2 (see M.S.Gordon and M.W.Schmidt, Chem.Phys.Lett.,
          132, 294-8(1986)) will readily converge with DIIS to a
          solution with a reasonable S**2, and an energy about 25
          milliHartree above the correct answer.  A SURE SIGN OF
          TROUBLE WITH DIIS IS WHEN THE ENERGY RISES TO ITS FINAL
          VALUE.  However, if you obtain orbitals at one point on a
          PES without DIIS, the subsequent use of DIIS with MOREAD
          will probably not introduce any problems.   Because DIIS
          is quite powerful, EXTRAP, DAMP, and SHIFT are all turned
          off once DIIS begins to work.  DEM and RSTRCT will still
          be in use, however.

              SOSCF.  Approximate second-order (quasi-Newton) SCF 
          orbital optimization.  SOSCF will converge about as well as 
          DIIS at the initial geometry, and slightly better at 
          subsequent geometries.  There's a bit less work solving the 
          SCF equations, too.   The method kicks in after the orbital
          gradient falls below SOGTOL.  Some systems, particularly
          transition metals with ECP basis sets, may have Huckel
          orbitals for which the gradient is much larger than SOGTOL.
          In this case it is probably better to use DIIS instead,
          with a large ETHRSH, rather than increasing SOGTOL, since
          you may well be outside the quadratic convergence region.
          SOSCF does not exhibit true second order convergence since
          it uses an approximation to the inverse hessian.  SOSCF
 
1
 
          will work for MOPAC runs, but is slower in this case.
          SOSCF will work for UHF, but the convergence is slower than
          DIIS.  SOSCF will work for non-Abelian ROHF cases, but may
          encounter problems if the open shell is degenerate.

              DEM.  Direct energy minimization should be your last
          recourse.  It explores the "line" between the current
          orbitals and those generated by a conventional change in
          the orbitals, looking for the minimum energy on that line.
          DEM should always lower the energy on every iteration,
          but is very time consuming, since each of the points
          considered on the line search requires evaluation of a
          Fock operator.  DEM will be skipped once the density
          change falls below DEMCUT, as the other methods should
          then be able to affect final convergence.   While DEM is
          working, RSTRCT is held to be true, regardless of the
          input choice for RSTRCT.  Because of this, it behooves
          you to be sure that the initial guess is occupying the
          desired orbitals.   DEM is available only for RHF.  The
          implementation in GAMESS resembles that of R.Seeger and
          J.A.Pople, J.Chem.Phys. 65, 265-271(1976).   Simultaneous
          use of DEM and DIIS resembles the ADEM-DIOS method of
          H.Sellers, Chem.Phys.Lett. 180, 461-465(1991).  DEM does
          not work with direct SCF.

 
               * * * High spin open shell SCF (ROHF) * * *
 
              Open shell SCF calculations are performed in GAMESS by
          both the ROHF code and the GVB code.  Note that when the
          GVB code is executed with no pairs, the run is NOT a true
          GVB run, and should be referred to in publications and
          discussion as a ROHF calculation.
 
              The ROHF module in GAMESS can handle any number of
          open shell electrons, provided these have a high spin
          coupling.  Some commonly occurring cases are:
 
          one open shell, doublet:
               $CONTRL SCFTYP=ROHF MULT=2 $END
 
          two open shells, triplet:
               $CONTRL SCFTYP=ROHF MULT=3 $END
 
          m open shells, high spin:
               $CONTRL SCFTYP=ROHF MULT=m+1 $END
 
1

              John Montgomery (then at United Technologies) is
          responsible for the current ROHF implementation in GAMESS.
          The following discussion is due to him:
 
              The Fock matrix in the MO basis has the form

                             closed       open        virtual
                  closed      F2      |     Fb     | (Fa+Fb)/2
                           -----------------------------------
                  open        Fb      |     F1     |    Fa
                           -----------------------------------
                  virtual   (Fa+Fb)/2 |     Fa     |    F0
 
          where Fa and Fb are the usual alpha and beta Fock
          matrices any UHF program produces.  The Fock operators
          for the doubly, singly, and zero occupied blocks can be
          written as

                  F2 = Acc*Fa + Bcc*Fb
                  F1 = Aoo*Fa + Boo*Fb
                  F0 = Avv*Fa + Bvv*Fb
 
              Some choices found in the literature for these
          canonicalization coefficients are
 
                                    Acc  Bcc  Aoo  Boo  Avv  Bvv
           Guest and Saunders       1/2  1/2  1/2  1/2  1/2  1/2
           Roothaan single matrix  -1/2  3/2  1/2  1/2  3/2 -1/2
           Davidson                 1/2  1/2   1    0    1    0
           Binkley, Pople, Dobosh   1/2  1/2   1    0    0    1
           McWeeny and Diercksen    1/3  2/3  1/3  1/3  2/3  1/3
           Faegri and Manne         1/2  1/2   1    0   1/2  1/2
 
              The choice of the diagonal blocks is arbitrary, as
          ROHF is converged when the off diagonal blocks go to zero.
          The exact choice for these blocks can however have an
          effect on the convergence rate.  This choice also affects
          the MO coefficients, and orbital energies, as the
          different choices produce different canonical orbitals
          within the three subspaces.  All methods, however, will
          give identical total wavefunctions, and hence identical
          properties such as gradients and hessians.
 
              The default coupling case in GAMESS is the Roothaan
          single matrix set.  Note that pre-1988 versions of GAMESS
          produced "Davidson" orbitals.  If you would like to fool
          around with any of these other canonicalizations, the Acc,
          Aoo, Avv and Bcc, Boo, Bvv parameters can be input as the
          first three elements of ALPHA and BETA in $SCF.
 
1
 
                 * * * Other open shell SCF cases (GVB) * * *
 
              Genuine GVB-PP runs will be discussed later in this
          section.  First, we will consider how to do open shell SCF
          with the GVB part of the program.
 
              It is possible to do other open shell cases with the
          GVB code, which can handle the following cases:
 
          one open shell, doublet:
               $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=2 $END
               $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO(1)=1 $END
          two open shells, triplet:
               $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=3 $END
               $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=2 NO(1)=1,1 $END
          two open shells, singlet:
               $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=1 $END
               $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=2 NO(1)=1,1 $END
 
              Note that the first two cases duplicate runs which the
          ROHF module can do better.  Note that all of these cases
          are really ROHF, since the default for NPAIR in $SCF is 0.
 
              Many open shell states with degenerate open shells
          (for example, in diatomic molecules) can be treated as
          well.  There is a sample of this in the 'Input Examples'
          section of this manual.
 
              If you would like to do any cases other than those
          shown above, you must derive the coupling coefficients
          ALPHA and BETA, and input them with the occupancies F in
          the $SCF group.
 
              Mariusz Klobukowski of the University of Alberta has
          shown how to obtain coupling coefficients for the GVB open
          shell program for many such open shell states.  These can
          be derived from the values in Appendix A of the book "A
          General SCF Theory" by Ramon Carbo and Josep M. Riera,
          Springer-Verlag (1978).  The basic rule is
 
                 (1)      F(i) = 1/2 * omega(i)
                 (2)  ALPHA(i) =       alpha(i)
                 (3)   BETA(i) =      - beta(i),
 
          where omega, alpha, and beta are the names used by Ramon
          in his Tables.
 
              The variable NSETO should give the number of open
          shells, and NO should give the degeneracy of each open
          shell.  Thus the 5-S state of carbon would have NSETO=2,
          and NO(1)=1,3.
 
1
 
             Some specific examples, for the lowest term in each
          of the atomic P**N configurations are
 
          !   p**1   2-P state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB  MULT=2   $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx   NSETO=1  NO=3   COUPLE=.TRUE.
                F(1)=  1.0  0.16666666666667
            ALPHA(1)=  2.0  0.33333333333333  0.00000000000000
             BETA(1)= -1.0 -0.16666666666667 -0.00000000000000  $END

          !   p**2   3-P state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB  MULT=3   $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx   NSETO=1  NO=3   COUPLE=.TRUE.
                F(1)=  1.0  0.333333333333333
            ALPHA(1)=  2.0  0.66666666666667  0.16666666666667
             BETA(1)= -1.0 -0.33333333333333 -0.16666666666667  $END

          !   p**3   4-S state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=ROHF  MULT=4   $END

          !   p**4   3-P state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB  MULT=3   $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx   NSETO=1  NO=3   COUPLE=.TRUE.
                F(1)=  1.0  0.66666666666667
            ALPHA(1)=  2.0  1.33333333333333  0.83333333333333
             BETA(1)= -1.0 -0.66666666666667 -0.50000000000000  $END

          !   p**5   2-P state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB  MULT=2   $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx   NSETO=1  NO=3   COUPLE=.TRUE.
                F(1)=  1.0  0.83333333333333
            ALPHA(1)=  2.0  1.66666666666667  1.33333333333333
             BETA(1)= -1.0 -0.83333333333333 -0.66666666666667  $END


             Be sure to give all the digits, as these are part of
          a double precision energy formula.
 
 
          Coupling constants for d**N configurations are
 
          !     d**1   2-D state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=2 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.1
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 0.20, 0.00
                    BETA(1)=-1.0,-0.10, 0.00  $END

          !     d**2   average of 3-F and 3-P states
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=3 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.2
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 0.40, 0.05
                    BETA(1)=-1.0,-0.20,-0.05  $END

1

          !     d**3   average of 4-F and 4-P states
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=4 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.3
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 0.60, 0.15
                    BETA(1)=-1.0,-0.30,-0.15  $END

          !     d**4   5-D state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=5 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.4
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 0.80, 0.30
                    BETA(1)=-1.0,-0.40,-0.30 $END

          !     d**5   6-S state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=ROHF MULT=6 $END

          !     d**6   5-D state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=5 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.6
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 1.20, 0.70
                    BETA(1)=-1.0,-0.60,-0.50 $END

          !     d**7   average of 4-F and 4-P states
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=4 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.7
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 1.40, 0.95
                    BETA(1)=-1.0,-0.70,-0.55  $END

          !     d**8   average of 3-F and 3-P states
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=3 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.8
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 1.60, 1.25
                    beta(1)=-1.0,-0.80,-0.65  $end

          !     d**9   2-D state
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB MULT=2 $END
           $SCF    NCO=xx NSETO=1 NO=5 COUPLE=.TRUE.  F(1)=1.0,0.9
                   ALPHA(1)= 2.0, 1.80, 1.60
                    BETA(1)=-1.0,-0.90,-0.80 $END
 
          The source for these values is R.Poirier, R.Kari, and
          I.G.Csizmadia's book "Handbook of Gaussian Basis Sets",
          Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1985.
 
          Note that GAMESS can do a proper calculation on the ground
          terms for the d**2, d**3, d**7, and d**8 configurations
          only by means of state averaged MCSCF.  For d**8, use

           $CONTRL SCFTYP=MCSCF MULT=3 $END
           $DRT    GROUP=C1 FORS=.TRUE. NMCC=xx NDOC=3 NALP=2 $END
           $GUGDIA NSTATE=10 $END
           $GUGDM2 WSTATE(1)=1,1,1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0 $END

          Open shell cases such as s**1,d**n are probably most easily
          tackled with the state-averaged MCSCF program.
 
1
 
                   * * * True GVB perfect pairing runs * * *
 
              True GVB runs are obtained by choosing NPAIR nonzero.
          If you wish to have some open shell electrons in addition
          to the geminal pairs, you may add the pairs to the end of
          any of the GVB coupling cases shown above.  The GVB module
          assumes that you have reordered your MOs into the order:
          NCO double occupied orbitals, NSETO sets of open shell
          orbitals, and NPAIR sets of geminals (with NORDER=1 in the
          $GUESS group).
 
              Each geminal consists of two orbitals and contains two
          singlet coupled electrons (perfect pairing).  The first MO
          of a geminal is probably heavily occupied (such as a
          bonding MO u), and the second is probably weakly occupied
          (such as an antibonding, correlating orbital v).  If you
          have more than one pair, you must be careful that the
          initial MOs are ordered u1, v1, u2, v2..., which is -NOT-
          the same order that RHF starting orbitals will be found
          in.  Use NORDER=1 to get the correct order.
 
              These pair wavefunctions are actually a limited form
          of MCSCF.  GVB runs are much faster than MCSCF runs,
          because the natural orbital u,v form of the wavefunction
          permits a Fock operator based optimization.  However,
          convergence of the GVB run is by no means assured.  The
          same care in selecting the correlating orbitals that you
          would apply to an MCSCF run must also be used for GVB
          runs.  In particular, look at the orbital expansions when
          choosing the starting orbitals, and check them again after
          the run converges.
 
              GVB runs will be carried out entirely in orthonormal
          natural u,v form, with strong orthogonality enforced on
          the geminals.  Orthogonal orbitals will pervade your
          thinking in both initial orbital selection, and the entire
          orbital optimization phase (the CICOEF values give the
          weights of the u,v orbitals in each geminal).  However,
          once the calculation is converged, the program will
          generate and print the nonorthogonal, generalized valence
          bond orbitals.  These GVB orbitals are an entirely
          equivalent way of presenting the wavefunction, but are
          generated only after the fact.
 
              Convergence of true GVB runs is by no means as certain
          as convergence of RHF, UHF, ROHF, or GVB with NPAIR=0.
          You can assist convergence by doing a preliminary RHF or 
          ROHF calculation, and use these orbitals for GUESS=MOREAD.
          Few, if any, GVB runs with NPAIR non-zero will converge 
          without using GUESS=MOREAD.  Generation of MVOs during the
          prelimnary SCF can also be advantageous.  In fact, all the 
          advice outlined for MCSCF computations below is germane,
          for GVB-PP is a type of MCSCF computation.
 
1
 
              The total number of electrons in the GVB wavefunction
          is given by the following formula:

                  NE = 2*NCO + sum 2*F(i)*NO(i) + 2*NPAIR
                                i

          The charge is obtained by subtracting the total number of
          protons given in $DATA.  The multiplicity is implicit in
          the choice of alpha and beta constants.  Note that ICHARG
          and MULT must be given correctly in $CONTRL anyway, as the
          number of electrons from this formula is double checked
          against the ICHARG value.
 
                    * * * the special case of TCSCF * * *
 
              The wavefunction with NSETO=0 and NPAIR=1 is called
          GVB-PP(1) by Goddard, two configuration SCF (TCSCF) by
          Schaefer or Davidson, and CAS-SCF with two electrons in
          two orbitals by others.  Note that this is just semantics,
          as these are all identical.  This is a very important
          type of wavefunction, as TCSCF is the minimum acceptable
          treatment for singlet biradicals.  The TCSCF wavefunction
          can be obtained with SCFTYP=MCSCF, but it is usually much 
          faster to use the Fock based SCFTYP=GVB.  Because of its 
          importance, the TCSCF function (if desired, with possible 
          open shells) permits analytic hessian computation.
 
                  * * * A caution about symmetry * * *
 
              Caution!  Some exotic calculations with the GVB
          program do not permit the use of symmetry.  The symmetry
          algorithm in GAMESS was "derived assuming that the
          electronic charge density transforms according to the
          completely symmetric representation of the point group",
          Dupuis/King, JCP, 68, 3998(1978).   This may not be true
          for certain open shell cases, and in fact during GVB runs,
          it may not be true for closed shell singlet cases!  

              First, consider the following correct input for the 
          singlet-delta state of NH:
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB NOSYM=1 $END
           $SCF    NCO=3 NSETO=2 NO(1)=1,1 $END
          for the x**1y**1 state, or for the x**2-y**2 state,
           $CONTRL SCFTYP=GVB NOSYM=1 $END
           $SCF    NCO=3 NPAIR=1 CICOEF(1)=0.707,-0.707 $END
          Neither gives correct results, unless you enter NOSYM=1.
          The electronic term symbol is degenerate, a good tip off
          that symmetry cannot be used.  However, some degenerate
          states can still use symmetry, because they use coupling
          constants averaged over all degenerate states within a
          single term, as is done in EXAM15 and EXAM16.  Here the
          "state averaged SCF" leads to a charge density which is
          symmetric, and these runs can exploit symmetry.
 
1
 
              Secondly, since GVB runs exploit symmetry for each
          of the "shells", or type of orbitals, some calculations on
          totally symmetric states may not be able to use symmetry.
          An example is CO or N2, using a three pair GVB to treat
          the sigma and pi bonds.  Individual configurations such
          as (sigma)**2,(pi-x)**2,(pi-y*)**2 do not have symmetric
          charge densities since neither the pi nor pi* level is
          completely filled.  Correct answers for the sigma-plus
          ground states result only if you input NOSYM=1.
 
             Problems of the type mentioned should not arise if
          the point group is Abelian, but will be fairly common in
          linear molecules.  Since GAMESS cannot detect that the GVB 
          electronic state is not totally symmetric (or averaged to
          at least have a totally symmetric density), it is left up
          to you to decide when to input NOSYM=1.  If you have any
          question about the use of symmetry, try it both ways.  If
          you get the same energy, both ways, it remains valid to
          use symmetry to speed up your run.

             And beware!  Brain dead computations, such as RHF on
          singlet O2, which actually is a half filled degenerate
          shell, violate the symmetry assumptions, and also violate
          nature.  Use of partially filled degenerate shells always
          leads to very wild oscillations in the RHF energy, which
          is how the program tries to tell you to think first, and
          compute second.  Configurations such as pi**2, e**1, or
          f2u**4 can be treated, but require GVB wavefunctions and
          F, ALPHA, BETA values from the sources mentioned.
 
1
 

                    How to do MCSCF and CI calculations
                    --- -- -- ----- --- -- ------------

              On the next pages, you will find older documentation for
          the MCSCF program.  In the summer of 2002, the changes to
          lead to a truly scalable MCSCF program were begun.  Since
          they are not yet completed, the documentation has not been 
          brought up to date.  In particular, the timing example cited
          in PROG.DOC's section on parallel runs reflects the older
          code version.

              The partial integral transformation used to set up the
          FULLNR converger has been changed to use distributed memory.
          This will scale like the MP2 energy/gradient program, to
          many nodes, and its EXETYP=CHECK should be performed in the 
          analogous style.  The simpler transformation for FOCAS/SOSCF 
          does not use distributed memory, and in fact the scaling
          of this MCSCF option is not very much changed yet.  The
          FULLNR step builds the orbital hessian in replicated memory
          at present, so large MEMORY may be needed as well as MEMDDI.

              The GUGA program used to be the only CI step enabled
          for parallel execution, with modest scalability.  The
          determinant programs have been changed to permit replicated
          computation on all nodes (zero speedup).  Since the ALDET
          program is much faster than GUGA, it is actually preferable
          to use the non-scaling determinant codes instead of the
          modestly scaling GUGA.  Total run time will be less!

          A chart of the MCSCF options in August 2003:
                          parallel run
                         transformation   CI computation via CISTEP
              converger      memory       GUGA   ALDET  GENCI  ORMAS
              ---------  --------------   ----   -----  -----  -----
               FOCAS       replicated      ok     ok    silly  silly
               SOSCF       replicated      ok     ok     ok     ok
               FULLNR      distributed     ok     ok     ok     ok
               QUAD          serial        ok     xx     xx     xx
               Jacobi        serial        ok     ok     ok     ok
          "ok" means you can run this computation.
          "xx" means QUAD converger is coded only for CISTEP=GUGA.
          "silly" means that this converger ignores active-active
               rotations, and since most runs with CISTEP=GENCI do
               not use a full CI space, these runs are likely to be
               divergent, or perhaps converge to a false solution.
          "serial" means this can only run sequentially at present.

              ORMAS is a full CI within the subspaces, but rotations
          between subspaces do affect the energy, so ORMAS is more
          likely to require FULLNR over SOSCF than will ALDET.

              A sample run, for no symmetry CI calculation with N
          electrons in N orbitals should convince most people to use
          the determinant CI code CISTEP=ALDET for must full active
          space jobs:
              N in N      ALDET       GENCI      ---  GUGA ---
                 8          0.8         1.4       0.7      0.5
                10          7.9        38.0      19.1     32.6
                12        227.5      3122.4     533.9   2208.7
                14       7985.2        --     15376.9 130855.2
          The reason there are two numbers under GUGA is that the
          first is for writing the loop info to disk (basically
          computing H elements) and the second is for the actual
          diagonalization.  Note that the formation time alone is
          greater than the entire ALDET computation, and that ALDET
          also has no big disk file holding loops.

              If you find something in the older documentation below
          that conflicts with this chart, believe the chart.

1

              Multi-configuration self consistent field (MCSCF)
          wavefunctions are the most general SCF type, offering a
          description of chemical processes involving the separation
          of electrons (bond breaking, electronically excited states,
          etc), which are often not well represented using the single
          configuration SCF methods.
          
              MCSCF wavefunctions, as the name implies, contain more
          than one configuration, each of which is multiplied by a
          "configuration interaction (CI) coefficient", determining
          it weight.  In addition, the orbitals which form each of
          the configurations are optimized, just as in a simpler SCF,
          to self consistency.

              Typically each chemical problem requires that an MCSCF
          wavefunction be designed to treat it, on a case by case
          basis.  For example, one may be interested in describing
          the reactivity of a particular functional group, instead of
          elsewhere in the molecule.  This means some attention must
          be paid in order to obtain correct results.

              Procedures for the selection of configurations (which
          amounts to choosing the number of active electrons and
          active orbitals), for the two mathematical optimizations
          just mentioned, ways to interpret the resulting MCSCF
          wavefunction, and the treatment for dynamical correlation
          not included in the MCSCF wavefunction are the focus of a
          recent review article:
              "The Construction and Interpretation 
               of MCSCF wavefunctions"
                   M.W.Schmidt and M.S.Gordon,  
                   Ann.Rev.Phys.Chem. 49,233-266(1998)
          One section of this is devoted to the problem of designing
          the correct active space to treat your problem.  Additional
          reading is listed at the end of this section.

              The most efficient technique implemented in GAMESS for
          finding the dynamic correlation energy is second order
          perturbation theory, in the variant known as MCQDPT. 
          MCQDPT is discussed in a different section of this chapter.
          The use of CI, probably in the form of second order CI,
          will be described below, en passant, during discussion of
          the input defining the configurations for MCSCF.  Selection
          of a CI following some type of SCF (except UHF) is made
          with CITYP in the $CONTRL group, and masterminded by the
          $CIINP group.

1
                       --- MCSCF implementation ---

              With the exception of the QUAD converger, the MCSCF
          program is of the type termed "unfolded two step" by Roos.
          This means the orbital and CI coefficient optimizations are
          separated.  The latter are obtained in a conventional CI
          diagonalization, while the former are optimized by a
          separate orbital improvement step.
 
              Each MCSCF iteration (except for the JACOBI and QUAD
          convergers) consists of the following steps:
          1) transformation of AO integrals to the current MO basis,
          2) generation of the Hamiltonian matrix and optimization
             of the CI coefficients by a Davidson diagonalization,
          3) generation of the first and second order density matrix, 
          4) improvement of the molecular orbitals.

              The CI problem in steps two and three has three options
          for the many electron basis, namely a full determinant or
          a selected determinant or a full configuration state
          function (CSF) list.  The choice of these is determined
          by CISTEP in $MCSCF.  More will be said just below about
          the differences between determinants and CSFs.  The word
          "configuration" is used in this section to refer to either
          when a generic term is needed for the many-electron basis,
          so please note there is a distinction between this and the
          very similar term CSF.

              The orbital problem in step four has four options,
          namely FOCAS, SOSCF, FULLNR, and JACOBI, listed here in
          order of their increasing mathematical sophistication,
          convergence characteristics, and of course, their computer
          resource requirements.  Again, these are chosen by keywords
          in the $MCSCF group.  More will be said just below about the
          relative merits of these.

              Finally, we mention again the QUAD converger, which 
          works only for a CSF basis, in which the two optimization
          problems are treated simultaneously, for modest numbers
          of configuratations (50-100 is probably the limit).  In
          principle, this is the most robust method available, but
          in practice, it has not received very much use compared
          to the unfolded methods.

              Depending on the converger chosen, the program will
          select the appropriate kind of integral transformation.
          There's seldom need to try to fine tune this, but note
          that the $TRANS group does let you pick an AO integral
          direct transformation with the DIRTRF flag.

              On the first iteration at the first geometry, you will
          receive the normal amount of output from each of these
          stages, while each subsequent iterations will produce only
          a single summarizing line.

1

                          --- orbital updates ---
 
              There are presently five orbital improvement options,
          namely FOCAS, SOSCF, FULLNR, JACOBI, and QUAD.  All but the
          JACOBI orbital update run in parallel.  The convergers are
          discussed briefly below, in order of increasing robustness.

              FOCAS is a first order, complete active space MCSCF
          optimization procedure.  The FOCAS code was written by
          Michel Dupuis and Antonio Marquez at IBM. It is based on a
          novel approach due to Meier and Staemmler, using very fast
          but numerous microiterations to improve the convergence of
          what is intrinsically a first order method.  Since FOCAS
          requires only one virtual orbital index in the integral
          transformation to compute the orbital gradient (aka the
          Lagrangian), the total MCSCF job may take less time than
          a second order method, even though it may require many
          more iterations to converge.  The use of microiterations is
          crucial to FOCAS' ability to converge.  It is important to
          take a great deal of care choosing the starting orbitals.

              SOSCF is a method built upon the FOCAS code, which
          seeks to combine the speed of FOCAS with second order
          convergence properties.  Thus SOSCF is an approximate
          Newton-Raphson, based on a diagonal guess at the orbital
          hessian, and in fact has much in common with the SOSCF 
          option in $SCF.  Its time requirements per iteration are
          like FOCAS, with a convergence rate better than FOCAS but
          not as good as true second order.  Storage of only the
          diagonal of the orbital hessian allows the SOSCF method
          to be used with much larger basis sets than exact second
          order methods.  Because it usually requires the least CPU
          time, disk space, and memory needs, SOSCF is the default.
          Good convergence by the SOSCF method requires that you 
          prepare starting orbitals carefully, and read in all MOs
          in $VEC, as providing canonicalized virtual orbitals
          increases the diagonal dominance of the orbital hessian.
 
              FULLNR means a full Newton-Raphson orbital improvement
          step is taken, using the exact orbital hessian.  FULLNR
          is a quite powerful convergence method, and normally takes
          the fewest iterations to converge.  Computing the exact
          orbital hessian requires two virtual orbital indices be
          included in the transformation, making this step quite time
          consuming, and of course memory for storage of the orbital
          hessian must be available.  Because both the transformation
          and orbital improvement steps of FULLNR are time consuming,
          FULLNR is not the default.  You may want to try FULLNR when
          convergence is difficult, assuming you have already tried
          preparing good starting orbitals by the hints below.

1

              The FULLNR MCSCF code in GAMESS is adapted from the
          HONDO7 program, and was written by Michel Dupuis at IBM.
          It uses the the augmented hessian matrix approach to solve
          the Newton-Raphson equations.  There are two suboptions
          for computation of the orbital hessian.  DM2 is the fastest
          but takes more memory than TEI. 

              The JACOBI method was written by Joe Ivanic and Klaus 
          Ruedenberg.  It uses a series of 2x2 orbital rotations by
          by an angle predicted to lower the energy.  This should
          essentially ensure convergence after sweeping over all 
          possible orbital pairs enough times.  The procedure was
          created to converge selected (general) determinant MCSCF
          functions, but of course it can be used will full lists
          as well in difficult cases.  The JACOBI calculation will
          consist of a full four index transformation over all MOs
          before the iterations begin.  Each iteration consists of
           1. a small 4 index transformation over active orbitals 
           2. optimization of the CI vector
           3. generation of the 1e- and 2e- density matrices
           4. sweeps over Jacobi rotations, using MO integrals in
              memory to generate each rotation, with a subsequent
              update after each pair is rotated.
           5. when sufficient energy lowering has been achieved,
              begin a new iteration.
          This procedure never generates the orbital Lagrangian!
          Unfortunately this means that at present it is not possible
          to compute nuclear gradients.  The energy should converge
          to a value that is a function of ENGTOL (ACURCY is of
          course irrelevant) but actually a bit better than ENGTOL.

              QUAD uses a fully quadratic, or second order approach
          and is thus the most powerful MCSCF converger.  The QUAD
          code is also adapted from Michel Dupuis's HONDO.  QUAD runs
          begin with unfolded FULLNR iterations, until the orbitals
          approach convergence sufficiently.  QUAD then begins the
          simultaneous optimization of CI coefficients and orbitals,
          and convergence should be obtained in 3-4 additional MCSCF
          iterations.  The QUAD method requires building the full
          hessian, including orbital/orbital, orbital/CI, and CI/CI
          blocks, which is a rather big matrix.  QUAD may be helpful
          in converging excited electronic states, but note that you
          may not use state averaging with QUAD.  QUAD is a memory
          hog, and so may be used only for fairly small numbers of
          configurations.
 
              The input to control the orbital update step is the
          $MCSCF group, where you should pick one of the convergence
          procedures.  Most of the input in this group is rather
          specialized, but note in particular MAXIT and ACURCY which
          control the convergence behaviour.

1

                      --- CI coefficient optimization ---

              Determinants or configuration state functions (CSFs)
          may be used to form the many electron basis set.  It is
          necessary to explain these in a bit of detail so that you
          can understand the advantages of each.

             A determinant is a simple object: a product of spin
          orbitals with a given Sz quantum number, that is, the
          number of alpha spins and number of beta spins are a
          constant.  Matrix elements involving determinants are
          correspondingly simple, but unfortunately determinants
          are not necessarily eigenfunctions of the S**2 operator.

              To expand on this point, consider the four familiar
          2e- functions which satisfy the Pauli principle.  Here u,
          v are space orbitals, and a, b are the alpha and beta spin
          functions.  As you know, the singlet and triplets are:
                 S1 = (uv + vu)/sqrt(2) * (ab - ba)/sqrt(2)
                 T1 = (uv - vu)/sqrt(2) *  aa
                 T2 = (uv - vu)/sqrt(2) * (ab + ba)/sqrt(2)
                 T3 = (uv - vu)/sqrt(2) *  bb
          It is a simple matter to multiply out S1 and T2, and to 
          expand the two determinants which have Sz=0,
                 D1 = |ua vb|          D2 = |va ub|
          This reveals that
                 S1 = (D1+D2)/sqrt(2)   or   D1 = (S1 + T2)/sqrt(2)
                 T2 = (D1-D2)/sqrt(2)        D2 = (S1 - T2)/sqrt(2)
          Thus, one must take a linear combination of determinants in
          order to have a wavefunction with the desired total spin.
          There are two important points to note:
            a) A two by two Hamiltonian matrix over D1 and D2 has
               eigenfunctions with -different- spins, S=0 and S=1.
            b) use of all determinants with Sz=0 does allow for the
               construction of spin adapted states.  D1+D2, or D1-D2,
               are -not- spin contaminated.
          By itself, a determinant such as D1 is said to be "spin
          contaminated", being a fifty-fifty admixture of singlet and
          triplet (it is curious that calculations with just one such
          determinant are often called "singlet UHF").  Of course,
          some determinants are spin adapted all by themselves, for
          example the spin adapted functions T1 and T3 above are
          single determinants, as are the closed shells
                 S2 = (uu) * (ab - ba)/sqrt(2).
                 S3 = (vv) * (ab - ba)/sqrt(2).
          It is possible to perform a triplet calculation, with no
          singlet states present, by choosing determinants with
          Sz=1 such as T1, since then no state with Sz=0 as is 
          required when S=0 exists in the determinant basis set.
          To summarize, the eigenfunctions of a Hamiltonian formed
          by determinants with any particular Sz will be spin states
          with S=Sz, S=Sz+1, S=Sz+2, ... but will not contain any S
          values smaller than Sz.
          
1

              CSFs are an antisymmetrized combination of a space
          orbital product, and a spin adapted linear combination of
          simple alpha-beta products.  Namely, the following CSF
                 C1 = A (uv) * (ab-ba)/sqrt(2)
          which has a singlet spin function is identical to S1 above
          if you write out what the antisymmetrizer A does, and the
          CSFs
                 C2 = A (uv) * aa
                 C3 = A (uv - vu)/sqrt(2) * (ab + ba)/sqrt(2)
                 C4 = A (uv) * bb
          equal T1-T3.  Since the three triplet CSFs have the same
          energy, GAMESS works with the simpler form C2.  Singlet
          and triplet computations using CSFs are done in separate
          runs, because when spin-orbit coupling is not considered,
          the Hamiltonian is block diagonal in a CSF basis.

              Technical information about the CSFs is that they use
          Yamanouchi-Kotani spin couplings, and matrix elements are
          obtained using a GUGA, or graphical unitary group approach.  
    
              Both determinant implementations and are primarily used
          for MCSCF wavefunctions.  The CSF code is capable of more
          general CI computations, and so can be used for first or
          second order CI computations.  Other comparisons between
          the determinant and CSF implementations, as they exist in
          GAMESS today, are
                                       determinants      CSFs
              parallel execution            no            yes
              direct CI                    yes             no
              uses Abelian space symmetry  yes            yes
              state average mixed spins    yes             no
              first order density          yes            yes
              state averaged densities     yes            yes
              can form CI Lagrangian        no            yes
          In nearly every circumstance the determinant CI will run
          faster than GUGA, so it is the default.  In addition, the
          quality of the initial guess of the CI eigenvector in the
          determinant code is much better than in the CSF code, so
          the chances of it converging to an incorrect excited state
          root is much less. 
 
              The next two sections describe in detail the input for
          specification of the configurations, either determinants
          or CSFs.
          
1

                            --- determinant CI ---
 
              Three determinant CI codes are provided for MCSCF, one
          for full CI spaces (ALDET), another for Occupation
          Restricted Multiple Active Spaces (ORMAS), and one for
          arbitrary (selected) determinant lists (GENCI).  For
          straight CI, but not MCSCF, there is a fourth program, the
          full second order CI (FSOCI).

              The simple $DET input group is basic to all determinant
          CI codes.  Keywords GROUP and ISTSYM specify the desired
          spatial symmetry of the determinants.  Most runs need give
          only the orbital and electron counts:  NCORE, NACT, and
          NELS.  The number of electrons is 2*NCORE+NELS, and will
          be checked against the charge implied by ICHARG.  The MULT
          given in $CONTRL is used to determine the desired Sz value,
          by extracting S from MULT=2S+1, then by default Sz=S.  If
          you wish to include lower spin multiplicities, which will
          increase the CPU time of the run, but will let you know
          what the energies of such states are, just input a smaller
          value for SZ.  The states whose orbitals will be MCSCF
          optimized will be those having the requested MULT value,
          unless you choose otherwise with the PURES flag.

              The remaining parameters in the $DET group give extra
          control over the diagonalization process.  Most are not
          given in normal circumstances, except NSTATE, which you
          may need to adjust to produce enough roots of the desired
          MULT value.  The only important keyword which has not been
          discussed is the WSTATE array, giving the weights for each
          state in forming the first and second order density matrix
          elements, which drive the orbital update methods.  Note
          that analytic gradients are available only when the WSTATE
          array is a unit vector, corresponding to a pure state, such
          as WSTATE(1)=0,1,0 which permits gradients of the first
          excited state to be computed.  When used for state averaged
          MCSCF, WSTATE is normalized to a unit sum, thus input of
          WSTATE(1)=1,1,1 really means a weight of 0.33333...  for
          the each of the states being averaged.

              ORMAS is a program designed to limit the size of the
          full CI problem, and may be useful when the number of 
          active orbitals is 10 or higher.  By dividing your total
          active space into multiple subspaces, and specifying a
          range of electrons to occupy each subspace, most of the
          full CI's effect can be included.  ORMAS generates a full
          CI within each orbital subspace, taking the product of
          each small full CI to generate the determinant list.
          Here are some ideas on how to use ORMAS, which is a very
          flexible program:

1

             a) single reference, arbitrary excition level CI-X
                 $det   ncore=y nact=z nels=10     (y+z=entire basis)
                 $ormas nspace=2 mstart(1)=y+1,y+6 mine(1)=10-x,0
                                                   maxe(1)=10,x
                excites the 5 doubly occupied orbitals, to the
                desired excitation level of X.

             b) simple product of active spaces
                For example, consider furan, with two active
                subspaces.  Keeping the 5 true core and the 4 CH
                bonds in the core space, the sigma subspace might
                contains 5 ring sigma, one oxygen lone pair, and 5
                ring sigma antibonds, with a total of 12 e-.  The pi
                active space contains 5 pi orbitals and 6 e-:
                 $det    ncore=9 nact=16 nels=18
                 $ormas  nspace=2 mstart(1)=10,21 mine(1)=12,6
                                                  maxe(1)=12,6
                Having the minimum and maximum electron counts the
                same is what makes this the simple product of two
                separate active spaces.  In other words, this is
                similar to the QCAS procedure of Nakano and Hirao,
                but ORMAS limits only the total electron counts, 
                not separately the numbers of alpha and beta e-,
                in other words all spin couplings are used.

             c) flexible occupancy between active subspaces
                Imagine that you are interested in excited states of
                formaldehyde, some of which will have Rydberg
                character, dominated by single excitations into 
                diffuse orbitals.  H2CO's valence states arise from 3
                orbitals, the CO pi and pi* and one oxygen lone pair.
                Placing the O sp lone pair and three sigma bonds into
                the filled space, and centering diffuse s,p,d shells
                on the carbon:
                 $det    ncore=6 nact=12 nels=4
                 $ormas  nspace=2 mstart(1)=7,10 mine(1)=3,0
                                                 maxe(1)=4,1
                This is a 4e-, 3 orbital n,pi,pi* space to describe
                valence states, and excites one electron into the 9
                diffuse orbitals to describe Rydberg states.  It is
                many fewer determinants than a 4e- in 12 orbital FCI.

             d) RAS-like CI
                The previous example is reminiscent of Roos' RAS-SCF.
                In fact ORMAS can do RAS-SCF, which is three spaces:
                the lowest space is allowed to excite only a few
                electrons, a middle space that is the rest, and a top
                space into which only a few electrons can be excited.
                Suppose there are 10 e-, 10 orbitals, that the bottom
                and top spaces involve 3 orbitals, and that a "few"
                means specifically 2 e-:
                 $det    ncore=20 nact=10 nels=10 $end
                 $ormas  nspace=3 mstart(1)=21,24,28 mine(1)=4,2,0
                                                     maxe(1)=6,6,2
                However, ORMAS can have more than 3 orbital subspaces.

1

             e) first or second order CI.
                Consider C2H4, with a 4 orbital active space of CC
                sigma, pi, pi*, and sigma*.  In order to correlate
                the four valence CH orbitals by double excitations,
                an MCSCF based on $DET, followed by SOCI based on
                $CIDET and $ORMAS, is:
                 $contrl scftyp=mcscf cityp=ormas
                 $mcscf  cistep=aldet
                 $det    ncore=6 nact=4 nels=4
                 $cidet  ncore=2 nact=y nels=12  (y=rest of basis)
                 $ormas  nspace=3 mstart(1)=3,7,11 mine(1)=6,2,0
                                                   maxe(1)=8,6,2
                which permits singles and doubles out of the CH and
                CC spaces, into the CC and external spaces.

             ORMAS is a full CI (or several full CI's) within each
          orbital subspace.  However, ORMAS does not generate all
          excitation levels between spaces (just those implied by the
          minimum and maximum electron counts you give).  This means
          ORMAS MCSCF runs must optimize active-active rotations
          between the subspaces, and therefore you should expect
          better convergence from FULLNR than SOSCF.

             ORMAS is sure to require orbital reordering.  For the
          furan example just mentioned, there is no reason to
          expect that the RHF occupied orbitals will not have the
          filled sigma and pi orbitals intermingled.  You must use
          the NORDER and IORDER keywords in $GUESS to carefully
          partition starting orbitals into sigma and pi subspaces.

              The selected (general) determinant list is used if
          CISTEP=GENCI, and the list is controlled by two input
          groups.  The first is $GEN, which is identical to $DET
          except for inclusion of an additional keyword GLIST=INPUT.
          This reads the determinants (as space products) from an
          additional input group $GCILST.  Completely arbitrary
          choices for the space products may be made, but peculiar
          lists may lead to poor MCSCF convergence.  The FOCAS
          converger may not be used, as that assumes full CI spaces.

              If you are doing straight CI calculations, the
          required input for each determinant CITYP is:
                ALDET needs $CIDET
                ORMAS needs $CIDET and $ORMAS
                GENCI needs $CIDET and $CIGEN and probably $GCILST
                FSOCI needs $CIDET and $SODET
          In other words, $CIDET replaces $DET, and $CIGEN replaces
          $GEN, but the keywords in the group mean the same thing.
          The reason for different names is to allow CI calculations
          to follow MCSCF in the same run, without clashing input
          group names.
          
1

                                --- CSF CI ---

              The GUGA-based CSF package was originally a set of
          different programs, so the input to control it is spread
          over several input groups.  The CSFs are specified by
          a $CIDRT group in the case of CITYP=GUGA, and by a $DRT
          group for MCSCF wavefunctions.  Thus it is possible to
          perform an MCSCF defined by a $DRT input (or perhaps using
          $DET during the MCSCF), and follow this with a second order
          CI defined by a $CIDRT group, in the same run.

              The remaining input groups used by the GUGA CSFs are
          $CISORT, $GUGEM, $GUGDIA, and $GUGDM2 for MCSCF runs, with
          the latter two being the most important, and in the case
          of CI computations, $GUGDM and possibly $LAGRAN groups are
          relevant.  Perhaps the most interesting variables outside
          the $DRT/$CIDRT group are NSTATE in $GUGDIA to include
          excited states in the CI computation, IROOT in $GUGDM to
          select the state for properties, and WSTATE in $GUGDM2 to
          control which (average) state's orbitals are optimized.
 
              The $DRT and $CIDRT groups are almost the same, with
          the only difference being orbitals restricted to double
          occupancy are called MCC in $DRT, and FZC in $CIDET.
          Therefore the rest of this section refers only to "$DRT".

              The CSFs are specified by giving a reference CSF,
          together with a maximum degree of electron excitation from
          that single CSF.  The MOs in the reference CSF are filled
          in the order MCC or FZC first, followed by DOC, AOS, BOS,
          ALP, VAL, and EXT (the Aufbau principle).  AOS, BOS, and
          ALP are singly occupied MOs.  ALP means a high spin alpha
          coupling, while AOS/BOS are an alpha/beta coupling to an
          open shell singlet.  This requires the value NAOS=NBOS,
          and their MOs alternate.  An example is
              NFZC=1 NDOC=2 NAOS=2 NBOS=2 NALP=1 NVAL=3
          which gives the reference CSF
              FZC,DOC,DOC,AOS,BOS,AOS,BOS,ALP,VAL,VAL,VAL
          This is a doublet state with five unpaired electrons.  VAL
          orbitals are unoccupied only in the reference CSF, they
          will become occupied as the other CSFs are generated.  This
          is done by giving an excitation level, either explicitly by
          the IEXCIT variable, or implicitly by the FORS, FOCI, or
          SOCI flags.  One of these four keywords must be chosen, and
          during MCSCF runs, this is usually FORS.
 
              Consider another simpler example, for an MCSCF run,
                NMCC=3 NDOC=3 NVAL=2
          which gives the reference CSF
                MCC,MCC,MCC,DOC,DOC,DOC,VAL,VAL
          having six electrons in five active orbitals.  Usually,
          MCSCF calculations are usually of the Full Optimized
          Reaction Space (FORS) type.  Some workers refer to FORS
          as CASSCF, complete active space SCF.  These are the same,
          but the keyword is spelled FORS.  In the present instance,
          choosing FORS=.TRUE. gives an excitation level of 4, as
          the 6 valence electrons have only 4 holes available for

1

          excitation.  MCSCF runs typically have only a small number
          of VAL orbitals.  It is common to summarize this example
          as "six electrons in five orbitals".

              The next example is a first or second order multi-
          reference CI wavefunction, where
                NFZC=3 NDOC=3 NVAL=2 NEXT=-1
          leads to the reference CSF
                FZC,FZC,FZC,DOC,DOC,DOC,VAL,VAL,EXT,EXT,...
          FOCI or SOCI is chosen by selecting the appropriate flag,
          the correct excitation level is automatically generated.
          Note that the negative one for NEXT causes all remaining
          MOs to be included in the external orbital space.  One way
          of viewing FOCI and SOCI wavefunctions is as all singles,
          or all singles and doubles, from the entire MCSCF wave-
          function as a reference.  An equivalent way of saying this
          is that all CSFs with N electrons (in this case N=6)
          distributed in the valence orbitals in all ways (that is
          the FORS MCSCF wavefunction) to make the base wavefunction.
          To this, FOCI adds all CSFs with N-1 electrons in active
          and 1 electron in external orbitals.  SOCI adds all CSFs
          with N-2 electrons in active orbitals and 2 in external
          orbitals.  SOCI is often prohibitively large, but is also
          a very accurate wavefunction.

              Sometimes people use the CI package for ordinary
          single reference CI calculations, such as
                  NFZC=3 NDOC=5 NVAL=34
          which means the reference RHF wavefunction is
                  FZC FZC FZC DOC DOC DOC VAL VAL ... VAL
          and in this case NVAL is a large number conveying the
          total number of -virtual- orbitals into which electrons
          are excited.  The excitation level would be given as
          IEXCIT=2, perhaps, to perform a SD-CI.  All excitations
          smaller than the value of IEXCIT are automatically
          included in the CI.  Note that NVAL's spelling was chosen
          to make the most sense for MCSCF calculations, and so it
          is a bit of a misnomer here.

               Before going on, there is a quirk related to single
          reference CI that should be mentioned.  Whenever the
          single reference contains unpaired electrons, such as
                 NFZC=3 NDOC=4 NALP=2 NVAL=33
          some "extra" CSFs will be generated.  The reference here
          can be abbreviated 
              2222 11 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
          Supposing IEXCIT=2, the following CSF
              2200 22 000 011 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
          will be generated and used in the CI.  Most people would
          prefer to think of this as a quadruple excitation from
          the reference, but acting solely on the reasoning that
          no more than two electrons went into previously vacant
          NVAL orbitals, the GUGA CSF package decides it is a double.
          So, an open shell SD-CI calculation with GAMESS will not
          give the same result as other programs, although the result

1

          for any such calculation with these "extras" is correctly
          computed.  Note that if you also select the INTACT option,
          the extra space products are eliminated, but that some of
          the spin couplings for the truly IEXCIT'd space products
          are also eliminated.

              As was discussed above, the CSFs are automatically
          spin-symmetry adapted, with S implicit in the reference
          CSF.  The spin quantum number you appear to be requesting
          in $DRT (basically, S = NALP/2) will be checked against
          the value of MULT in $CONTRL, and the total number of
          electrons, 2*NMCC(or NFZC) + 2*NDOC + NAOS + NBOS + NALP
          will be checked against the input given for ICHARG.
          
              The CSF package is also able to exploit spatial
          symmetry, which like the spin and charge, is implicitly
          determined by the choice of the reference CSF.  The keyword
          GROUP in $DRT governs the use of spatial symmetry.
 
              The CSF program works with Abelian point groups, which
          are D2h and any of its subgroups.  However, $DRT allows
          the input of some (but not all) higher point groups.  For
          non-Abelian groups, the program automatically assigns the
          orbitals to an irrep in the highest possible Abelian
          subgroup.  For the other non-Abelian groups, you must at
          present select GROUP=C1.  Note that when you are computing
          a Hessian matrix, many of the displaced geometries are
          asymmetric, hence you must choose C1 in $DRT (however, be
          sure to use the highest symmetry possible in $DATA!).
 
              The symmetry of the reference CSF given in your $DRT
          determines the symmetry of the CSFs which are generated.
          As an example, consider a molecule with Cs symmetry, and
          these two reference CSFs
                ...MCC...DOC DOC VAL VAL
                ...MCC...DOC AOS BOS VAL
          Suppose that the 2nd and 3rd active MOs have symmetries a'
          and a".  Both of these generate singlet wavefunctions,
          with 4 electrons in 4 active orbitals, but the former
          constructs 1-A' CSFs, while the latter generates 1-A"
          CSFs.  However, if the 2nd and 3rd orbitals have the same 
          symmetry type, an identical list of CSFs is generated.

              In cases with high point group symmetry, it may be
          possible to generate correct state degeneracies only by
          using no symmetry (GROUP=C1) when generating CSFs.  As
          an example, consider the 2-pi ground state of NO.  If you
          use GROUP=C4V, which will be mapped into its highest
          Abelian subgroup C2v, the two components of the pi state
          will be seen as belonging to different irreps, B1 and B2.
          The only way to ensure that both sets of CSFs are generated
          is to enforce no symmetry at all, so that CSFs for both
          components of the pi level are generated.  This permits
          state averaging (WSTATE(1)=0.5,0.5) to preserve cylindrical
          symmetry.  It is however perfectly feasible to use C4v or
          D4h symmetry in $DRT when treating sigma states.

1

               The use of spatial symmetry decreases the number of
          CSFs, and thus the size of the Hamiltonian that must be
          computed.  In molecules with high symmetry, this may lead
          to faster run times with the GUGA CSF code, compared to
          the determinant code.

                          --- starting orbitals ---
 
              The first step is to partition the orbital space into
          core, active, and external sets, in a manner which is
          sensible for your chemical problem.  This is a bit of an
          art, and the user is referred to the references quoted at
          the end of this section.  Having decided what MCSCF to
          perform, you now must consider the more pedantic problem
          of what orbitals to begin the MCSCF calculation with.
 
              You should always start an MCSCF run with orbitals
          from some other run, by means of GUESS=MOREAD.  Do not
          expect to be able to use HCORE or HUCKEL!  Example 6 is a
          poor example, converging only because methylene has so much
          symmetry, and the basis is so small.  If you are beginning
          your MCSCF problem, use orbitals from some appropriate
          converged SCF run.  Thus, a realistic example of an MCSCF
          calculation is examples 8 and 9.  Once you get an MCSCF
          to converge, you can and should use these MCSCF MOs (which
          will be Schmidt orthogonalized) at other nearby geometries.

              Starting from SCF orbitals can take a little bit of
          care.  Most of the time (but not always) the orbitals you
          want to correlate will be the highest occupied orbitals in
          the SCF.  Fairly often, however, the correlating orbitals
          you wish to use will not be the lowest unoccupied virtuals
          of the SCF.  You will soon become familiar with NORDER=1
          in $GUESS, as reordering is needed in 50% or more cases.
 
             The occupied and especially the virtual canonical SCF
          MOs are often spread out over regions of the molecule other
          than "where the action is".  Orbitals which remedy this can
          generated by two additional options at almost no CPU cost.

              One way to improve upon the SCF orbitals as starting
          MOs is to generate modified virtual orbitals (MVOs).
          MVOs are obtained by diagonalizing the Fock operator of a
          very positive ion, within the virtual orbital space only.
          As implemented in GAMESS, MVOs can be obtained at the end
          of any RHF, ROHF, or GVB run by setting MVOQ in $SCF
          nonzero, at the cost of a single SCF cycle.  Typically, we
          use MVOQ=+6.  Generating MVOs does not change any of the
          occupied SCF orbitals of the original neutral, but gives
          more valence-like LUMOs.

              Another way to improve SCF starting orbitals is by
          a partial localization of the occupied orbitals.  Typically
          MCSCF active orbitals are concentrated in the part of the

1

          molecule where bonds are breaking, etc.  Canonical SCF MOs
          are normally more spread out.  By choosing LOCAL=BOYS along
          with SYMLOC=.TRUE. in $LOCAL, you can get orbitals which
          are localized, but still retain orbital symmetry to help
          speed the MCSCF along.  In groups with an inversion center,
          a SYMLOC Boys localization does not change the orbitals,
          but you can instead use LOCAL=POP.  Localization tends to
          order the orbitals fairly randomly, so be prepared to 
          reorder them appropriately.

              Pasting the virtuals from a MVOQ run onto the occupied
          orbitals of a SYMLOC run (both can be done in the same SCF
          computation) gives the best possible set of starting
          orbitals.  If you also take the time to design your active
          space carefully, select the appropriate starting orbitals
          from this combined $VEC, and inspect your converged results,
          you will be able to carry out MCSCF computations correctly.
 
              Convergence of MCSCF is by no means guaranteed.  Poor
          convergence can invariably be traced back to either a poor
          initial selection of orbitals, or a poorly chosen number of
          active orbitals.  My advice is, before you even start: 
              "Look at the orbitals.
               Then look at the orbitals again".
          Later, if you have any trouble:
              "Look at the orbitals some more".
          Few people are able to see the orbital shapes in the LCAO
          matrix in a log file, and so need a visualization program.
          If you have a Macintosh, download a copy of MacMolPlt from
              http://www.msg.ameslab.gov/GAMESS/GAMESS.html
          for 2D or 3D plots, or use PLTORB under X-windows for 2D.

              Even if you don't have any trouble, look at the
          orbitals to see if they converged to what you expected,
          and have reasonable occupation numbers.  It is particularly
          useful to check the oriented localized MCSCF orbitals (see
          the discussion of this in the section on localized orbitals
          in this section for more information).  MCSCF is by no meand
          the sort of "black box" that RHF is these days, so please
          look very carefully at your final results.

                        --- miscellaneous hints ---
 
              It is very helpful to execute a EXETYP=CHECK run
          before doing any MCSCF or CI run.  The CHECK run will tell
          you the total number of configurations and check the charge
          and multiplicity and electronic state symmetry, based on 
          your input.  The CHECK run also lets the program feel out
          the memory that will be required to actually do the run.
          Thus the CHECK run can potentially prevent costly mistakes,
          or tell you when a calculation is prohibitively large.

1
 
              A very common MCSCF wavefunction has 2 electrons in 2
          active MOs.  This is the simplest possible wavefunction
          describing a singlet diradical.  While this function can be
          obtained in an MCSCF run (using NACT=2 NELS=2 or NDOC=1
          NVAL=1), it can be obtained much faster by use of the GVB
          code, with one GVB pair.  This GVB-PP(1) wavefunction is
          also known in the literature as two configuration SCF, or
          TCSCF.  The two configurations of this GVB are equivalent
          to the three configurations used in this MCSCF, as orbital
          optimization in natural form (configurations 20 and 02)
          causes the coefficient of the 11 configuration to vanish.
 
              If you are using many GUGA CSFs (say 150,000 or more)
          the main bottleneck in the MCSCF calculation is the
          formation and diagonalization of the Hamiltonian, not the
          integral transformation and orbital improvement steps.  
          In this case, you would be wise to switch to FULLNR, which
          will minimize the total number of iterations.  In addition,
          each orbital improvement may contain some microiterations,
          which consists of an integral transformation over the new
          MOs, followed immediately by a orbital improvement, reusing
          the current 2nd order density matrix.  MICIT=2 in $MCSCF
          may lead to better overall run times by doing two orbital
          updates for every CI diagonalization step.

              Since the determinant CI is a direct CI, it does not
          have the bottleneck of storing a large disk file containing
          Hamiltonian information.  However, very large active spaces
          containing 13 or 14 orbitals may result in more time being
          spent in CI iterations than in the rest of the MCSCF steps.
          The analogous trick to MICIT=2 is ITERMX in $DET or $GEN,
          which may be set to a value like ITERMX=2 or ITERMX=3 to
          improve the CI vectors only a bit.  Since each iteration's
          CI calculation starts with the previous iterations result,
          the CI step will become fully converged during the MCSCF
          cycles.  The total run time may decrease, although there
          may be a few additional MCSCF iterations required.  For
          small active spaces where the CI step takes trivial time,
          you should use a bigger ITERMX to ensure fully converged 
          CI states are generated on every iteration.
 
              If you choose to use ORMAS, a general determinant CI,
          or if you select an excitation level IEXCIT smaller than
          that needed to generate the FORS space, you must use the
          SOSCF, JACOBI, or FULLNR method as these can optimize
          active-active rotations.  Be sure to set FORS=.FALSE. in
          $MCSCF when for non-full CI cases, or else very poor
          convergence will result.  Actually, the convergence for
          incomplete active spaces is likely to be poorer than for
          full active spaces, anyway.

1

                        --- references ---
 
              There are several review articles about MCSCF listed
          below.  Of these, the first two are a nice overview of the
          subject, the final 3 are more technical.
 
            1.  "The Construction and Interpretation of MCSCF
                  wavefunctions"
                M.W.Schmidt and M.S.Gordon,  
                   Ann.Rev.Phys.Chem. 49,233-266(1998)
           2a. "The Multiconfiguration SCF Method"
                B.O.Roos, in "Methods in Computational Molecular
                  Physics", edited by G.H.F.Diercksen and S.Wilson
                  D.Reidel Publishing, Dordrecht, Netherlands,
                  1983, pp 161-187.
           2b. "The Multiconfiguration SCF Method"
                B.O.Roos, in "Lecture Notes in Quantum Chemistry",
                  edited by B.O.Roos, Lecture Notes in Chemistry v58, 
                  Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1994, pp 177-254.
            3. "Optimization and Characterization of a MCSCF State"
               J.Olsen, D.L.Yeager, P.Jorgensen
                  Adv.Chem.Phys. 54, 1-176(1983).
            4. "Matrix Formulated Direct MCSCF and Multiconfiguration
                 Reference CI Methods"
               H.-J.Werner,  Adv.Chem.Phys.  69, 1-62(1987).
            5. "The MCSCF Method"
               R.Shepard,  Adv.Chem.Phys.  69, 63-200(1987).
 
              There is an entire section on the choice of active
          spaces in Reference 1.  As this is a matter of great
          importance, here are two alternate presentations of the
          design of active spaces:
 
            6. "The CASSCF Method and its Application in Electronic
                 Structure Calculations"
               B.O.Roos, in "Advances in Chemical Physics", vol.69,
                  edited by K.P.Lawley, Wiley Interscience, New York,
                  1987, pp 339-445.
            7. "Are Atoms Intrinsic to Molecular Electronic
                 Wavefunctions?"
               K.Ruedenberg, M.W.Schmidt, M.M.Gilbert, S.T.Elbert
                 Chem.Phys. 71, 41-49, 51-64, 65-78 (1982).
 
              Two papers germane to the FOCAS implementation are
   
            8. "An Efficient first-order CASSCF method based on
                  the renormalized Fock-operator technique."
               U.Meier, V.Staemmler  Theor.Chim.Acta 76, 95-111(1989)
            9. "Modern tools for including electron correlation in
                  electronic structure studies"
               M.Dupuis, S.Chen, A.Marquez, in "Relativistic and
                  Electron Correlation Effects in Molecules and
                  Solids", edited by G.L.Malli, Plenum, NY 1994

1

              The paper germane to the the SOSCF method is

           10. "Approximate second order method for orbital
                optimization of SCF and MCSCF wavefunctions"
               G.Chaban, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
               Theor.Chem.Acc. 97: 88-95(1997)
 
              Two papers germane to the FULLNR implementation, and
           one discussing the implementation details are
 
           11. "General second order MCSCF theory: A Density Matrix
                  Directed Algorithm"
               B.H.Lengsfield, III, J.Chem.Phys. 73,382-390(1980).
           12. "The use of the Augmented Matrix in MCSCF Theory"
               D.R.Yarkony, Chem.Phys.Lett. 77,634-635(1981).
           13. M.Dupuis, P.Mougenot, J.D.Watts, in "Modern Techniques
               in Theoretical Chemistry", E.Clementi, editor, ESCOM,
               Leiden, 1989, chapter 7.

              The paper describing the JACOBI converger is

           14. "A MCSCF method for ground and excited states based on
                full optimizatons of successive Jacobi rotations"
               J.Ivanic, K.Ruedenberg  J.Comput.Chem. 24, 1250-1262(2003)

              For determinants and CSFs, respectively, see

           15. "Identification of deadwood in configuration spaces
                through general direct configuration interaction"
               J.Ivanic, K.Ruedenberg
                 Theoret.Chem.Acc. 106, 339-351(2001)
           16. "The GUGA approach to the electron correlation problem"
               B.R.Brooks, H.F.Schaefer
                 J.Chem.Phys.  70, 5092-5106(1979)

              The final references are simply some examples of FORS
          MCSCF applications, the latter done with GAMESS.
 
           16. D.F.Feller, M.W.Schmidt, K.Ruedenberg,
                 J.Am.Chem.Soc. 104, 960-967(1982).
           17. M.W.Schmidt, P.N.Truong, M.S.Gordon,
                 J.Am.Chem.Soc. 109, 5217-5227(1987).
 
1

                      Second order perturbation theory

             The perturbation theory techniques available in GAMESS
          expand to the second order energy correction only, but 
          permit use of a broad range of zeroth order wavefunctions.
          Since MP2 theory for systems well described as closed 
          shells recovers only about 80% of the correlation energy
          (assuming the use of large basis sets), it is common to
          extend the perturbative treatment to higher order, or to
          use coupled cluster theory.  While this is reasonable for
          systems well described by RHF or UHF with small spin 
          contamination, this is probably a poor approach when the 
          system is not well described at zeroth order by these wave-
          functions.
          
             The input for second order pertubation calculations
          based on SCFTYP=RHF, UHF, or ROHF is found in $MP2, while 
          for SCFTYP=MCSCF, see $MCQDPT.
          
          
          --- RHF and UHF MP2
          
             These methods are well defined, due to the uniqueness
          of the Fock matrix definitions.  These methods are also
          well understood, and there is little need to say more.
          
             One point which may not be commonly appreciated is that
          the density matrix for the first order wavefunction for the
          RHF and UHF case, which is generated during gradient runs
          or if properties are requested in the $MP2 group, is of the
          type known as "response density", which differs from the
          more usual "expectation value density".  The eigenvalues
          of the response density matrix (which are the occupation
          numbers of the MP2 natural orbitals) can therefore be
          greater than 2 for frozen core orbitals, or even negative
          values for the highest 'virtual' orbitals.  The sum is
          of course exactly the total number of electrons.  We have
          seen values outside the range 0-2 in several cases where
          the single configuration RHF wavefunction was not an 
          appropriate description of the system, and thus these
          occupancies may serve as a guide to the wisdom of using
          a RHF reference.  See 
            M.S.Gordon, M.W.Schmidt, G.M.Chaban, K.R.Glaesemann,
            W.J.Stevens, C.Gonzalez  J.Chem.Phys. 110,4199-4207(1999)
          By default, frozen core MP2 calculations are performed.
          
1

          --- high spin ROHF MP2
          
             There are a number of open shell perturbation theories
          described in the literature.  It is important to note that
          these methods give different results for the second order
          energy correction, reflecting ambiguities in the selection
          of the zeroth order Hamiltonian and in defining the ROHF
          Fock matrices.  Two of these are available in GAMESS.
          
             One theory is known as RMP, which it should be pointed
          out, is entirely equivalent to the ROHF-MBPT2 method.  The
          theory is as UHF-like as possible, and can be chosen in
          GAMESS by selection of OSPT=RMP in $MP2.  The second order
          energy is defined by
            1. P.J.Knowles, J.S.Andrews, R.D.Amos, N.C.Handy,
               J.A.Pople  Chem.Phys.Lett. 186, 130-136(1991)
            2. W.J.Lauderdale, J.F.Stanton, J.Gauss, J.D.Watts, 
               R.J.Bartlett  Chem.Phys.Lett. 187, 21-28(1991).
          The submission dates are in inverse order of publication 
          dates, and -both- papers should be cited when using this
          method.  Here we will refer to the method as RMP in
          keeping with much of the literature.  The RMP method 
          diagonalizes the alpha and beta Fock matrices separately, 
          so that their occupied-occupied and virtual-virtual blocks
          are canonicalized.  This generates two distinct orbital 
          sets, whose double excitation contributions are processed
          by the usual UHF MP2 program, but an additional energy 
          term from single excitations is required.
          
             RMP's use of different orbitals for different spins adds
          to the CPU time required for integral transformations, of
          course.  RMP is invariant under all of the orbital 
          transformations for which the ROHF itself is invariant.
          Unlike UMP2, the second order RMP energy does not suffer 
          from spin contamination, since the reference ROHF wave-
          function has no spin contamination.  The RMP wavefunction,
          however, is spin contaminated at 1st and higher order,
          and therefore the 3rd and higher order RMP energies are
          spin contaminated.  Other workers have extended the RMP
          theory to gradients and hessians at second order, and to
          fourth order in the energy,
            3. W.J.Lauderdale, J.F.Stanton, J.Gauss, J.D.Watts,
               R.J.Bartlett  J.Chem.Phys. 97, 6606-6620(1992)
            4. J.Gauss, J.F.Stanton, R.J.Bartlett
               J.Chem.Phys. 97, 7825-7828(1992)
            5. D.J.Tozer, J.S.Andrews, R.D.Amos, N.C.Handy
               Chem.Phys.Lett.  199, 229-236(1992)
            6. D.J.Tozer, N.C.Handy, R.D.Amos, J.A.Pople, R.H.Nobes,
               Y.Xie, H.F.Schaefer  Mol.Phys. 79, 777-793(1993)
          We deliberately omit references to the ROMP precurser to
          the RMP formalism.

1

             The ZAPT formalism is also implemented in GAMESS, as
          OSPT=ZAPT in $MP2.  Because this theory is not spin-
          contaminated at any order, and has only a single set of
          orbitals in the MO transformation, it is the default.
          References for ZAPT (Z-averaged perturbation theory) are
            7. T.J.Lee, D.Jayatilaka  Chem.Phys.Lett. 201, 1-10(1993)
            8. T.J.Lee, A.P.Rendell, K.G.Dyall, D.Jayatilaka
               J.Chem.Phys. 100, 7400-7409(1994)
          The formulae for the seven terms in the energy are most
          clearly summarized in the paper
            9. I.M.B.Nielsen, E.T.Seidl
               J.Comput.Chem. 16, 1301-1313(1995)
          We would like to thank Tim Lee for very gracious assistance
          in the implementation of ZAPT.

             There are a number of other open shell theories, with
          names such as HC, OPT1, OPT2, and IOPT.  The literature
          for these is
           10. I.Hubac, P.Carsky  Phys.Rev.A  22, 2392-2399(1980)
           11. C.Murray, E.R.Davidson
               Chem.Phys.Lett. 187,451-454(1991)
           12. C.Murray, E.R.Davidson
               Int.J.Quantum Chem. 43, 755-768(1992)
           13. P.M.Kozlowski, E.R.Davidson
               Chem.Phys.Lett. 226, 440-446(1994)
           14. C.W.Murray, N.C.Handy
               J.Chem.Phys. 97, 6509-6516(1992)
           15. T.D.Crawford, H.F.Schaefer, T.J.Lee
               J.Chem.Phys. 105, 1060-1069(1996)
          The latter two of these give comparisons of the various
          high spin methods, and the numerical results in ref. 15
          are the basis for the conventional wisdom that restricted
          open shell theory is better convergent with order of the
          perturbation level than unrestricted theory.  Paper 8 has
          some numerical comparisons of spin-restricted theories
          as well.  We are aware of one paper on low-spin coupled
          open shell SCF perturbation theory
           16. J.S.Andrews, C.W.Murray, N.C.Handy
               Chem.Phys.Lett. 201, 458-464(1993)
          but this is not implemented in GAMESS.  See the MCQDPT
          code for cases such as this.
          
1

          
          --- GVB based MP2
          
             This is not implemented in GAMESS.  Note that the MCSCF
          MP2 program discussed below should be able to develop the 
          perturbation correction for open shell singlets, by using
          a $DRT input such as
             NMCC=N/2-1 NDOC=0 NAOS=1 NBOS=1 NVAL=0
          which generates a single CSF if the two open shells have 
          different symmetry, or for a one pair GVB function
             NMCC=N/2-1 NDOC=1 NVAL=1
          which generates a 3 CSF function entirely equivalent to 
          the two configuration TCSCF, a.k.a GVB-PP(1).  For the
          record, we note that if we attempt a triplet state with
          the MCSCF program,
             NMCC=N/2-1 NDOC=0 NALP=2 NVAL=0
          we get a result equivalent to the OPT1 open shell method
          described above, not the RMP result.  It is possible to
          generate the orbitals with a simpler SCF computation than
          the MCSCF $DRT examples just given, and read them into the
          MCSCF based MP2 program described below, by INORB=1.
          
          
          --- MCSCF based MP2
          
             Just as for the open shell case, there are several ways
          to define a multireference perturbation theory.  The most
          noteworthy are the CASPT2 method of Roos' group, the MRMP2
          method of Hirao, the MROPTn methods of Davidson, and the
          MCQDPT2 method of Nakano.  Although the results of each 
          method are  different, energy differences should be rather
          similar.  In particular, the MCQDPT2 method implemented in
          GAMESS gives results for the singlet-triplet splitting of
          methylene in close agreement to CASPT2, MRMP2(Fav), and
          MROPT1, and differs by 2 Kcal/mole from MRMP2(Fhs), and
          the MROPT2 to MROPT4 methods.
          
             The MCQDPT method implemented in GAMESS is a multistate 
          perturbation theory.  If applied to 1 state, it is the same
          as the MRMP model of Hirao.  When applied to more than one
          state, it is of the philosophy "perturb first, diagonalize 
          second".  This means that perturbations are made to both
          the diagonal and offdiagonal elements of an effective
          Hamiltonian, whose dimension equals the number of states 
          being treated.  The perturbed Hamiltonian is diagonalized 
          to give the corrected state energies.  Diagonalization 
          after inclusion of the offdiagonal perturbation ensures
          that avoided crossings of states of the same symmetry are 
          treated correctly.  Such an avoided crossing is found in 
          the LiF molecule, as shown in the first of the two papers 
          on the MCQDPT method:
             H.Nakano, J.Chem.Phys. 99, 7983-7992(1993)
             H.Nakano, Chem.Phys.Lett. 207, 372-378(1993)
          
1

          The closely related single state "diagonalize, then perturb"
          MRMP model is discussed by
             K.Hirao, Chem.Phys.Lett. 190, 374-380(1992)
             K.Hirao, Chem.Phys.Lett. 196, 397-403(1992)
             K.Hirao, Int.J.Quant.Chem.  S26, 517-526(1992)
             K.Hirao, Chem.Phys.Lett. 201, 59-66(1993)
          Computation of reference weights and energy contributions
          is illustrated by
             H.Nakano, K.Nakayama, K.Hirao, M.Dupuis
                 J.Chem.Phys. 106, 4912-4917(1997)
             T.Hashimoto, H.Nakano, K.Hirao
                 J.Mol.Struct.(THEOCHEM) 451, 25-33(1998)
          Single state MCQDPT computations are very similiar to MRMP
          computations.  A beginning set of references to the other
          multireference methods used includes:
             P.M.Kozlowski, E.R.Davidson 
               J.Chem.Phys. 100, 3672-3682(1994)
             K.G.Dyall  J.Chem.Phys.  102, 4909-4918(1995)
             B.O.Roos, K.Andersson, M.K.Fulscher, P.-A.Malmqvist,
             L.Serrano-Andres, K.Pierloot, M.Merchan
               Adv.Chem.Phys. 93, 219-331(1996).
          and a review article is available comparing these methods,
             E.R.Davidson, A.A.Jarzecki in "Recent Advances in Multi-
             reference Methods" K.Hirao, Ed. World Scientific, 1999,
             pp 31-63.
          
             The MCQDPT code was written by Haruyuki Nakano, and was
          interfaced to GAMESS by him in the summer of 1996.  After
          a few months experience, we can say that this code seems to
          run in memory, disk, and CPU time comparable to the MCSCF
          computation itself.  It can be used for 150 to 250 AOs, for
          example.  A 2001 calculation with 351 AOs, 116 cores, and 8 
          active orbitals and 8 electrons was more heroic, requiring
          an attached disk subsystem of 100 GBytes.  Efficiency is 
          improved if you can add extra physical memory to reduce the
           number of file reads.

             We close the discussion with an input example which
          illustrates RMP and MCQDPT computations on the ground state
          of NH2 radical:
          
          !  2nd order perturbation test on NH2, following
          !  T.J.Lee, A.P.Rendell, K.G.Dyall, D.Jayatilaka
          !  J.Chem.Phys. 100, 7400-7409(1994), Table III.
          !  State is 2-B-1, 69 AOs, 49 CSFs.
          !
          !  For 1 CSF reference,
          !    E(ROHF) = -55.5836109825
          !     E(RMP) = -55.7772299929   (lit. RMP = -75.777230)
          !  E(MCQDPT) = -55.7830423024   (lit. OPT1= -75.783044)
          ! [E(MCQDPT) = -55.7830437413 at the lit's OPT1 geometry]
          !
          !  For 49 CSF reference,
          !   E(MCSCF) = -55.6323324949
          !  E(MCQDPT) = -55.7857458575
          !
          
1

           $contrl scftyp=mcscf mplevl=2 runtyp=energy mult=2 $end
           $system timlim=60 memory=1000000 $end
           $guess  guess=moread norb=69 $end
           $mcscf  fullnr=.true. $end
          !  Next two lines carry out a MCQDPT computation, after
          !  carrying out a full valence MCSCF orbital optimization.
           $drt    group=c2v fors=.t. nmcc=1 ndoc=3 nalp=1 nval=2 $end
           $mcqdpt inorb=0 mult=2 nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=6
                   istsym=3 nstate=1 $end
          !  Next two lines carry out a single reference computation,
          !  using converged ROHF orbitals from the $VEC.
          --- $drt    group=c2v fors=.t. nmcc=4 ndoc=0 nalp=1 nval=0 $end
          --- $mcqdpt inorb=1 nmofzc=1 nmodoc=3 nmoact=1
          ---         istsym=3 nstate=1 $end
           $data
          NH2...2-B-1...TZ2Pf basis, RMP geom. used by Lee, et al.
          Cnv  2
          
          Nitrogen   7.0
            S 6
             1 13520.0    0.000760
             2  1999.0    0.006076
             3   440.0    0.032847
             4   120.9    0.132396
             5    38.47   0.393261
             6    13.46   0.546339
            S 2
             1    13.46   0.252036
             2     4.993  0.779385
            S 1 ; 1 1.569  1.0
            S 1 ; 1 0.5800 1.0
            S 1 ; 1 0.1923 1.0
            P 3
             1 35.91  0.040319
             2  8.480 0.243602
             3  2.706 0.805968
            P 1 ; 1 0.9921 1.0
            P 1 ; 1 0.3727 1.0
            P 1 ; 1 0.1346 1.0
            D 1 ; 1 1.654 1.0
            D 1 ; 1 0.469 1.0
            F 1 ; 1 1.093 1.0
          
          Hydrogen   1.0  0.0 0.7993787 0.6359684
            S 3   ! note that this is unscaled
             1 33.64  0.025374
             2  5.058 0.189684
             3  1.147 0.852933
            S 1 ; 1 0.3211 1.0
            S 1 ; 1 0.1013 1.0
            P 1 ; 1 1.407 1.0
            P 1 ; 1 0.388 1.0
            D 1 ; 1 1.057 1.0
          
           $end
          E(ROHF)= -55.5836109825, E(NUC)= 7.5835449477, 9 ITERS
           $VEC ...omitted...  $END

1

                            Coupled-Cluster theory

             The coupled-cluster (CC) theory is widely recognized as
          one of the most accurate methods for describing ground
          electronic states of atoms and molecules.  CC approaches
          provide the best compromise between relatively low computer
          costs and high accuracy.  For example, the popular CCSD(T)
          approach, which is a No**2 * Nu**4 procedure in the
          iterative CCSD steps and a No**3 * Nu**4 procedure in the
          non-iterative steps related to the calculation of triples
          corrections, is capable of providing results of the CISDTQ
          quality (which is a iterative No**4 * Nu**6 procedure).
          Here, No and Nu are the numbers of correlated occupied and
          unoccupied orbitals.  Unlike CI methods, all standard CC
          methods provide size extensive descriptions of molecular
          systems.

             Thanks to numerous advances in both the formal aspects
          of the CC theory and the development of efficient computer
          codes, the single-reference CC approach is nowadays
          routinely used in calculations for closed-shell and simple
          open-shell electronic ground states of atomic and molecular
          systems.  Extensions of the CC theory to quasi-degenerate
          and excited states are possible, via the multi-reference,
          equation-of-motion, and response formalisms, and it is
          expected that at least some of these extensions will become
          at least as popular as the existing multi-reference CI or
          CASSCF methods.  We should also add that the CC theory is
          a fundamental many-body formalism, whose applicability
          ranges from electronic structure of atoms and molecules and
          nuclear physics to extended systems, phase transitions,
          condensed matter theory, theories of homogeneous electron
          gas, and relativistic quantum field theory, to mention a
          few examples.

             A number of review articles have been written over the
          years and it is difficult to cite all of them here.  We
          recommend that users of GAMESS planning to use CC methods
          read one or more reviews listed below:

          "Coupled-cluster theory"
            J. Paldus, in S. Wilson and G.H.F. Diercksen (Eds.),
            Methods in Computational Molecular Physics, NATO Advanced
            Study Institute, Series B: Physics, Vol. 293, Plenum, New
            York, 1992, p. 99-194.
          "Applications of post-Hartree-Fock methods: a tutorial."
            R.J. Bartlett and J.F. Stanton, in K.B. Lipkowitz and
            D.B.Boyd (Eds.), Reviews in Computational Chemistry,
            Vol. 5, VCH Publishers, New York, 1994, p. 65-169.
          "Coupled-Cluster Theory: an Overview of Recent Developments"
            R.J. Bartlett, in D.R. Yarkony (Ed.), Modern Electronic
            Structure Theory, Part I, World Scientific, Singapore,
            1995, p. 1047-1131.
          "Achieving chemical accuracy with coupled-cluster theory"
            T.J. Lee and G.E. Scuseria, in S.R. Langhoff (Ed.),
            Quantum Mechanical Electronic Structure Calculations with

1

            Chemical Accuracy, Kluwer, Dordrecht, The Netherlands,
            1995, p. 47-108.
          "A Critical Assessment of Coupled Cluster Method in Quantum
           Chemistry"
            J. Paldus and X. Li, Adv. Chem. Phys. 110, 1 (1999),
            T.D. Crawford and H.F. Schaefer III,
          "An Introduction to Coupled Cluster Theory for Computational
            Chemists"
            T.D.Crawford, H.F.Schaefer in K.B. Lipkowitz and D.B.Boyd
            (Eds.), Reviews in Computational Chemistry, Vol. 14, VCH
            Publishers, New York, 2000, p. 33-136.

          These reviews point to the other review articles and many
          original papers.  The list of original papers relevant to
          CC methods implemented in GAMESS is provided below.


                      * * * available computations * * *

             The CC program incorporated in GAMESS enables the user
          to perform the standard LCCD, CCD, CCSD, CCSD[T] (also
          known as CCSD+T(CCSD)) and CCSD(T) calculations and the
          renormalized (R) and completely renormalized (CR) CCSD[T]
          and CCSD(T) calculations for closed-shell RHF references.
          Performance of the standard CC methods has been discussed
          in a number of places (cf. the review articles mentioned
          above).  Methods such as CCSD(T) provide excellent results
          for molecules in or near their equilibrium geometries.
          Almost all standard CC methods are very good in describing
          dynamical correlation, while being relatively inexpensive
          and easy to use.  We must remember, however, that they
          should not be applied to bond breaking and quasi-degenerate
          states when the RHF determinant is used as a reference.

             The unique features of the CC code in GAMESS are the
          renormalized (R) and completely renormalized (CR) CCSD[T]
          and CCSD(T) methods, which are based on the more general
          formalism of the method of moments of coupled-cluster
          equations (MMCC).  These new methods remove the pervasive
          failing of the standard CCSD[T] and CCSD(T) approximations
          at larger internuclear separations, while preserving the
          simplicity and the relatively low cost of the standard
          methods.  In analogy to the CCSD[T] and CCSD(T) methods,
          the R-CCSD[T], R-CCSD(T), CR-CCSD[T], and CR-CCSD(T)
          approaches are based on an idea of improving the CCSD
          results by adding a posteriori noniterative corrections to
          CCSD energies.  The CR-CCSD[T] and CR-CCSD(T) approaches
          eliminate the unphysical humps on the potential energy
          surfaces involving single bond breaking produced by the
          standard CCSD[T] and CCSD(T) methods.  The R-CCSD[T] and
          R-CCSD(T) approaches may improve the standard CCSD[T] and
          CCSD(T) results at intermediate internuclear separations,
          but they usually fail at larger distances.  The CR-CCSD[T]
          and CR-CCSD(T) methods are much better in this regard,
          since they provide a very good description of single bond
          breaking at all internuclear separations.  This includes
          various cases of unimolecular dissociations and exchange

1

          chemical reactions, in which single bonds break and form.
          We do not recommend applying the CR-CCSD[T] and CR-CCSD(T)
          approaches to multiple bond breaking (in this case, one
          should resort to the completely renormalized CCSD(TQ) and
          CCSDT(Q) approaches or to the so-called MMCC(2,6) method;
          these approaches will be included in GAMESS in the future).
          A detailed description of the R-CCSD[T], R-CCSD(T),
          CR-CCSD[T], and CR-CCSD(T) and other MMCC methods can be
          found in the papers at the very end of this subsection by
          Piecuch, Kucharski, Kowalski, et al.

             The R-CCSD[T], R-CCSD(T), CR-CCSD[T], and CR-CCSD(T)
          methods are not strictly size extensive: there are unlinked
          terms in the MBPT (many-body perturbation theory) expansions
          of the renormalized and completely renormalized [T] and (T)
          corrections to CCSD energies.  This has no effect on bond
          breaking (on the contrary, the CR-CCSD[T] and CR-CCSD(T)
          potential surfaces are MUCH better than potential energy
          surfaces obtained in the standard CCSD[T] and CCSD(T)
          calculations), but lack of strict size extensivity may have
          an effect on the results of calculations for very large and
          extended systems.  A lot depends on the values of the T2
          amplitudes.  If they are small, then the denominator
          expressions which define the renormalized [T] and (T)
          corrections are very close to 1, in which case there is no
          major problem.  If the T2 amplitudes are large, then the
          denominators may become significantly greater than 1.  This
          behavior of the R-CCSD[T], R-CCSD(T), CR-CCSD[T], and
          CR-CCSD(T) denominator expressions is useful for improving
          the results for bond breaking, since the denominators
          defining the renormalized [T] and (T) corrections damp the
          unphysical values of the standard [T] and (T) corrections
          at larger internuclear separations.  However, for very
          large systems, the denominators defining the renormalized
          [T] and (T) corrections may "overdamp" the [T] and (T)
          corrections.  Numerical tests indicate that lack of strict
          size extensivity has very little (fraction of a milli-
          hartree) effect on the results of the CR-CCSD[T] and
          CR-CCSD(T) calculations for smaller and medium size systems.
          For large systems, such as the glycine dimer described by
          the 6-31G basis set, the departure from size extensivity,
          as measured by forming the difference of the sum of the
          energies of isolated glycine molecules from the energy of
          the dimer consisting of glycine molecules at very large
          (200 bohr) distance, is ca. 3 millihartree (2 kcal/mol).

                        * * * resource requirements * * *

              User can perform LCCD, CCD, and CCSD calculations, that
          is without calculating the [T] and (T) corrections, or
          calculate the entire set of the standard and renormalized
          [T] and (T) corrections, in addition to the CCSD energies
          (cf. the values of input variable CCTYP in $CONTRL).  The
          most expensive steps in CC calculations scale as follows:

1

          LCCD, CCD or CCSD        No**2 times Nu**4     (iterative)

          CCSD[T], CCSD(T),
          R-CCSD[T], R-CCSD(T),
          CR-CCSD[T], CR-CCSD(T).  No**3 times Nu**4 (non-iterative)

          The cost of calculating the standard CCSD[T] and CCSD(T)
          energies and the cost of calculating the R-CCSD[T] and
          R-CCSD(T) energies are essentially the same.  The cost of
          calculating the triples corrections of the CR-CCSD[T] and
          CR-CCSD(T) approaches is essentially twice the cost of
          calculating the standard CCSD[T] and CCSD(T) corrections.
          Although the triples corections may be seen to grow as the
          seventh power of the system size, they often require less
          time than the sixth power iterations of the CCSD step,
          while providing a great increase in accuracy.

             Rough estimates of the memory required are:

          CCSD                    4 No**2 times Nu**2 + No times Nu**3

          CCSD[T], CCSD(T),
          R-CCSD[T], R-CCSD(T)    4 No**2 times Nu**2 + No times Nu**3

          CR-CCSD[T], CR-CCSD(T)  No**2 times Nu**2 + 2 * No times Nu**3
                                  (a faster algorithm), or
                                  4 No**2 times Nu**2 + No times Nu**3
                                  (a somewhat slower but less memory
                                   consuming algorithm)

          The program automatically selects the algorithm for the
          CR-CCSD[T] and CR-CCSD(T) calculations, depending on the
          amount of available memory.  The above estimates are rough.

             The time required for calculating the CR-CCSD[T] and
          CR-CCSD(T) triples corrections is only twice the cost of
          calculating the standard CCSD[T] and CCSD(T) corrections.
          Thus, by just doubling the CPU time for the noniterative
          triples corrections and by selecting CCTYP = CR-CC, we gain
          access to all six noniterative triples corrections (the
          CCSD[T], CCSD(T), R-CCSD[T], R-CCSD(T), CR-CCSD[T], and
          CR-CCSD(T) energies) plus, of course, to the CCSD energy.
          At the same time, the CR-CCSD[T] and CR-CCSD(T) results for
          stretched nuclear geometries are better than the results of
          the standard CCSD[T] and CCSD(T) calculations.   In some
          cases, choosing CCTYP = R-CC might be reasonable, too.
          The choice CCTYP=R-CC gives five different energies (CCSD,
          CCSD[T], CCSD(T), R-CCSD[T], and R-CCSD(T)) for the price
          of three (CCSD, CCSD[T], and CCSD(T)) as the there is no
          extra time needed for the R- theories compared to the
          standard ones.

          We encourage the user to read the paper
             P.Piecuch, S.A.Kucharski, K.Kowalski, M.Musial
             Comput.Phys.Comm., 149, 71-96(2002)
          where time and memory requirements for various types of CC
          calculations are described in considerable detail.

1

                            * * * restarts * * *

              The CC code incorporated in GAMESS is quite good in
          converging the CCSD equations with the default guess for
          cluster amplitudes.  The code is designed to converge in
          relatively few iterations for significantly stretched
          nuclear geometries, where it is not unusual to obtain large
          cluster amplitudes whose absolute values are close to 1.
          This is accomplished by combining the standard Jacobi
          algorithm with the DIIS extrapolation method of Pulay.  The
          maximum number of amplitude vectors used in the DIIS
          extrapolation procedure  is defined by the input variable
          MXDIIS.  The default for MXDIIS is as follows:
              MXDIIS = 5, for 5 < No*Nu,
              MXDIIS = 3, for 2 < No*Nu < 6,
              MXDIIS = 0, for No*Nu < 3.
          Thus, in the vast majority of cases, the default value of
          MXDIIS is 5.  However, for very small problems, when the
          DIIS expansion subspace leads to singular systems of linear
          equations, it is necessary to reduce the value of MXDIIS to
          2-4 (we chose 3) or switch off DIIS altogether (which is
          the case when MXDIIS = 0).

              It may, of course, happen that the solver for the CCSD
          equations does not converge, in spite of increasing the
          maximum number of iterations (input variable MAXCC; the
          default value is 30) and in spite of changing the default
          value of MXDIIS.  In order to facilitate the calculations
          in all such cases, we included the restart option in the CC
          codes incorporated in GAMESS.  Thus, the user can restart a
          CCSD (or (L)CCD) calculation from the restart file created
          by an earlier CC calculation.  In order to use the restart
          option, the user must save the disk file CCREST from the
          previous CC run (cf. the GAMESS script rungms).  A restart
          is invoked by entering a nonzero value for IREST, which
          should be the number of the last iteration completed, and
          must be some value greater than or equal 3.  Examples of
          using the restart option include the following situations:

          o The CCSD program did not converge in MAXCC iterations,
            but there is a chance to converge it if the value of
            MAXCC is increased.  User restarts the calculation with
            the increased value of MAXCC.

          o User ran a CCSD calculation, obtaining the converged CCSD
            energy, but later decided to run a CR-CCSD(T) calculation.
            Instead of running the entire CCSD --> CR-CCSD(T) task
            again, user restarts the calculation after changing the
            value of input variable CCTYP, and entering IREST to
            reuse the previous CCSD amplitudes, proceeding at once
            to the non-iterative triples.

1

          o The CCSD program diverged for some geometry with a
            significantly stretched bond.  User performs an extra
            calculation for a different nuclear geometry, for which
            it is easier to converge the CCSD equations, and restarts
            the calculation from the restart file generated by an
            extra calculation.  This technique of restarting the CC
            calculations from the cluster amplitudes obtained for a
            neighboring nuclear geometry is particularly useful for
            scanning PESs and for calculating energy derivatives by
            numerical differentiation.


                            * * * references * * *

          The rest of this section is references to the original
          formulation of various areas in Coupled-Cluster Theory.

          Electronic structure:
          J. Cizek, J. Chem. Phys. 45, 4256 (1966)
          J. Cizek, Adv. Chem. Phys. 14, 35 (1969),
          J. Cizek and J. Paldus, Int. J. Quantum Chem. 5, 359 (1971),
          Nuclear theory:
          F. Coester, Nucl. Phys. 7, 421 (1958),
          F. Coester and H. Kuemmel, Nucl. Phys. 17, 477 (1960).

          Coupled-Cluster Method with Doubles (CCD) -
          J. Cizek, J. Chem. Phys. 45, 4256 (1966),
          J. Cizek, Adv. Chem. Phys. 14, 35 (1969),
          J. Cizek and J. Paldus, Int. J. Quantum Chem. 5, 359 (1971),
          J.A. Pople, R. Krishnan, H.B. Schlegel, and J.S. Binkley,
               Int. J. Quantum Chem. Symp. 14, 545 (1978),
          R.J. Bartlett and G.D. Purvis,
               Int. J. Quantum Chem. Symp. 14, 561 (1978).
          J. Paldus, J. Chem. Phys. 67, 303 (1977)
               [orthogonally spin-adapted formulation].

          Linearized Coupled-Cluster Method with Doubles (LCCD; 
               cf., also, D-MBPT(infinity), CEPA(0))
          J. Cizek, J. Chem. Phys. 45, 4256 (1966)
          J. Cizek, Adv. Chem. Phys. 14, 35 (1969)
          R.J. Bartlett, I. Shavitt, Chem.Phys.Lett.50, 190 (1977)
               57, 157 (1978) [Erratum]
          R. Ahlrichs, Comp. Phys. Commun. 17, 31 (1979).

          Coupled-Cluster Method with Singles and Doubles (CCSD) -
          G.D.Purvis III, R.J.Bartlett, J.Chem.Phys. 76, 1910 (1982)
               [spin-orbital formulation],
          P.Piecuch and J.Paldus, Int.J.Quantum Chem. 36, 429 (1989)
               [orthogonally spin-adapted formulation],
          G.E.Scuseria, A.C.Scheiner, T.J.Lee, J.E.Rice,
               H.F.Schaefer III, J. Chem. Phys. 86, 2881 (1987)
               [non-orthogonally spin-adapted formulation],
          G.E. Scuseria, C.L. Janssen, H.F.Schaefer III
               J. Chem. Phys. 89, 7382 (1988)
               [non-orthogonally spin-adapted formulation]
          T.J. Lee and J.E. Rice, Chem. Phys. Lett. 150, 406 (1988)
               [non-orthogonally spin-adapted formulation].

1

          Coupled-Cluster Method with Singles and Doubles and
          Noniterative Triples, CCSD[T] = CCSD+T(CCSD) -
          M. Urban, J. Noga, S. J. Cole, and R. J. Bartlett,
               J. Chem. Phys. 83, 4041 (1985),
          P. Piecuch and J. Paldus, Theor. Chim. Acta 78, 65 (1990)
               [orthogonally spin-adapted formulation].

          Coupled-Cluster Method with Singles and Doubles and
          Noniterative Triples, CCSD(T) -
          K. Raghavachari, G. W. Trucks, J. A. Pople, M. Head-Gordon,
               Chem.  Phys. Lett. 157, 479 (1989).

          Renormalized and Completely Renormalized Coupled-Cluster
          Methods, Method of Moments of Coupled-Cluster Equations
          (Ground States) -
          P.Piecuch, K.Kowalski,
             in J.Leszczynski (Ed.), Computational Chemistry:
             Reviews of Current Trends, Vol. 5, World Scientific,
             Singapore, 2000, p.1
          K.Kowalski, P.Piecuch, J.Chem.Phys. 113, 18-35(2000)
          K.Kowalski, P.Piecuch, J.Chem.Phys. 113, 5644-5652(2000)
          K.Kowalski, P.Piecuch, Chem.Phys.Lett. 344, 165 (2001)
          P.Piecuch, S.A.Kucharski, K.Kowalski,
             Chem.Phys.Lett. 344, 176(2001)
          P.Piecuch, S.A.Kucharski, V.Spirko, K.Kowalski,
             J.Chem.Phys. 115, 5796 (2001)
          P.Piecuch, K.Kowalski, I.S.O.Pimienta, S.A.Kucharski,
             in M.R.Hoffmann, K.G.Dyall (Eds.), Low-Lying Potential
             Energy Surfaces, ACS Symposium Series, Vol. 828, Am.
             Chem. Society, Washington, D.C., 2002, p. XXX,
          M.J.McGuire, K.Kowalski, P.Piecuch,
             J.Chem.Phys., in press (2002)
          P.Piecuch, S.A.Kucharski, K.Kowalski, M.Musial,
             Comput.Phys.Comm., 149, 71-96(2002).

          T1 diagnostic:
          T.J.Lee, P.R.Taylor Int.J.Quantum Chem., S23, 199-207(1989)
          T1>0.02 indicates CCSD may not correct a system which is
          not very single reference in nature.  (T) corrections
          tolerate somewhat greater singles amplitudes.

1
 
                          Density Functional Theory
                          ------- ---------- ------

            There are actually two DFT programs in GAMESS, one
         using the typical grid quadrature for integration of
         functionals, and one using resolution of the identity to
         avoid the need for grids.  The default program is
         METHOD=GRID is discussed below, but we will begin with a
         description of METHOD=GRIDFREE.  The final section is
         references to various functionals, and other topics of
         interest.  

                    *  *  * DFTTYP keywords *  *  *

         For convenience in comparing to other DFT programs, the
         following table matches DFTTYP to their input keywords:
             GAMESS   NWChem      MOLPRO2000    Gaussian94     
             Slater  slater            S           HFS
             Gill    gill96
             PBE     xpbe96
             SVWN    slater vwn_5    S,VWN         SVWN5
             SLYP    slater lyp      S,LYP         SLYP
             Becke   becke88           B           HFB
             BVWN    becke88 vwn_5   B,VWN         BVWN5
             BLYP    becke88 lyp     B,LYP         BLYP
             B3LYP   -see note-      B3LYP
          This table applies to both grid and grid-free DFTTYPs.

             Note that B3LYP in GAMESS is based in part on the VWN5
          correlation functional.  Since there are five formulae
          in the VWN paper for local correlation, other programs
          may use other formulae, and therefore generate different
          B3LYP energies.  For example, NWChem's manual says it uses
          the "VWN 1 functional with RPA parameters as opposed to the
          prescribed Monte Carlo parameters", but NWChem can be made
          to use the VWN5 formula by
              xc HFexch 0.20 slater 0.80 becke88 nonlocal 0.72 
                   lyp 0.81 vwn_5 0.19
          If you use some other program, its B3LYP energy will be
          different from GAMESS if it does not employ VWN5.

                       *  *  * Grid-free DFT *  *  *

             The grid-free code is a research tool into the use of
          the resolution of the identity to simplify evaluation of
          integrals over functionals, rather than quadrature grids.
          This trades the use of finite grids and their associated
          errors for the use of a finite basis set used to expand
          the identity, with an associated truncation error.  The
          present choice of auxiliary basis sets was obtained by
          tests on small 2nd row molecules like NH3 and N2, and
          hence the built in bases for the 3rd row are not as well
          developed.  Auxiliary bases for the remaining elements do
          not exist at the present time.

1

             The grid-free Becke/6-31G(d) energy at a C1 AM1 geometry
          for ethanol is -154.084592, while the result from a run
          using the "army grade grid" is -154.105052.  So, the error
          using the AUX3 RI basis is about 5 milliHartree per 2nd row
          atom (the H's must account for some of the error too).  The
          energy values are probably OK, the differences noted should
          by and large cancel when comparing two different geometries.

             The grid-free gradient code contains some numerical
          inaccuracies, possibly due to the manner in which the RI
          is implemented for the gradient.  Computed gradients
          consequently may not be very reliable.  For example, a
          Becke/6-31G(d) geometry optimization of water started from
          the EXAM08 geometry behaves as:
            FINAL E=  -76.0439853638, RMS GRADIENT = .0200293
            FINAL E=  -76.0413274662, RMS GRADIENT = .0231574
            FINAL E=  -76.0455283912, RMS GRADIENT = .0045887
            FINAL E=  -76.0457360477, RMS GRADIENT = .0009356
            FINAL E=  -76.0457239113, RMS GRADIENT = .0001222
            FINAL E=  -76.0457216186, RMS GRADIENT = .0000577
            FINAL E=  -76.0457202264, RMS GRADIENT = .0000018
            FINAL E=  -76.0457202253, RMS GRADIENT = .0000001
          Examination shows that the point on the PES where the
          gradient is zero is not where the energy is lowest, in
          fact the 4th geometry is the lowest encountered.  

          The behavior for Becke/6-31G(d) ethanol is as follows:
            FINAL E= -154.0845920132,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0135540
            FINAL E= -154.0933138447,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0052778
            FINAL E= -154.0885472996,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0009306
            FINAL E= -154.0886268185,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0002043
            FINAL E= -154.0886352947,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000795
            FINAL E= -154.0885599794,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000342
            FINAL E= -154.0885514829,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000679
            FINAL E= -154.0884955093,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000205
            FINAL E= -154.0886438244,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000330
            FINAL E= -154.0886596883,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000325
            FINAL E= -154.0886094081,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000120
            FINAL E= -154.0886054003,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000109
            FINAL E= -154.0885939751,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000152
            FINAL E= -154.0886711482,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000439
            FINAL E= -154.0886972557,  RMS GRADIENT =  .0000230
          with similar fluctuations through a total of 50 steps
          without locating a zero gradient.  Note that the second
          energy above is substantially below all later points, so
          geometry optimizations with the grid-free DFT gradient
          code are at this time unsatisfactory.

                       *  *  * DFT with grids *  *  *

              The default METHOD=GRID produces good energy and 
          gradient quantities.  For example, when running the same
          Becke/6-31G(d) ethanol test case, the default grid will
          produce an ethanol energy -154.104863 to be compared to
          -154.105052 using the "army grade" grid.  Thus energy
          errors should be less than a tenth of a milliHartree per

1

          atom with the standard grid.  Note that the energies are
          nonetheless a function of the grid size, just as they are
          a function of the basis used, so you must only compare
          runs that use the same grid size.  The grid code will
          give gradient vectors that are accurate, and lead to
          satisfactory geometry optimizations.  This means that
          DFT frequencies obtained by numerical differentiation
          should also be OK.  RUNTYP=ENERGY, GRADIENT, HESSIAN,
          and their chemical combinations for OPTIMIZE, SADPOINT,
          IRC, DRC, VSCF, RAMAN, and FFIELD should all work, but
          TRANSITN, MOROKUMA, and TDHF should not be used with DFT.

              The grid DFT uses symmetry during the quadrature in two
          ways.  First, the integration runs only over grid points
          placed around the symmetry unique atoms.  Also, "octant
          symmetry" is implemented using an appropriate Abelian
          subgroup of the full group.  Your run should be done in the
          full non-Abelian group, so that the usual integrals and the
          SCF steps can exploit full symmetry.  The grid evaluation
          automatically uses an appropriate subgroup to reduce the
          number of grid points for atoms that lie on symmetry axes
          or planes.  For example, in Cs, atoms lying in the xy plane
          will be integrated only over the upper hemisphere of their
          grid points.  Octant symmetry is not used for any of these:
            a) if a non-standard axis orientation is input in $DATA
            b) if the angular grid size (NTHE,NTHE0,NPHI,NPI0) is not
               a multiple of the octant symmetry factors, such as
               NTHE=15 in C2v.  The permissible values depend on the
               group, but NTHE a multiple of 2 and NPHI a multiple of
               4 is generally safe.

                        *  *  * references *  *  *

          An excellent overview can be found in Chapter 6 of Frank
          Jensen's book.  Two other monographs are
              "Density Functional Theory of Atoms and Molecules"
              R.G.Parr, W.Yang  Oxford Scientific, 1989
              "A Chemist's Guide to Density Functional Theory"
              W.Koch, M.C.Holthausen  Wiley-VCH 2001

          A delightful thought provoking paper on the relationship of
          DFT to conventional quantum mechanics using wavefunctions:
              P.M.W.Gill  Aust.J.Chem. 54, 661-662(2001)

              Some reading on the grid-free approach to density
          functional theory is:
               Y.C.Zheng, J.Almlof
                  Chem.Phys.Lett. 214, 397-401(1996)
               Y.C.Zheng, J.Almlof
                  J.Mol.Struct.(Theochem) 288, 277(1996)
               K.Glaesemann, M.S.Gordon
                  J.Chem.Phys. 108, 9959-9969(1998)
               K.Glaesemann, M.S.Gordon
                  J.Chem.Phys. 110, 6580-6582(1999)
               K.Glaesemann, M.S.Gordon
                  J.Chem.Phys. 112, 10738-10745(2000)
1

          Three papers on gridding:
            C.W.Murray, N.C.Handy, G.L.Laming 
               Mol.Phys.  78, 997-1014(1993)
            P.M.W.Gill, B.G.Johnson, J.A.Pople
               Chem.Phys.Lett. 209, 506-512(1993)
            R.Lindh, P.-A.Malmqvist, L.Gagliardi
               Theoret.Chem.Acc.  106, 178-187(2001)

          Slater exchange:
            J.C.Slater  Phys.Rev. 81, 385-390(1951)
          XALPHA is Slater with alpha=0.70

          BECKE (often called B88) exchange:
            A.D.Becke  Phys.Rev. A38, 3098-3100(1988)

          GILL (often called G96) exchange:
            P.M.W.Gill  Mol.Phys.  89, 433-445(1996)

          PBE exchange/correlation functional:
            J.P.Perdew, K.Burke, M.Ernzerhof
               Phys.Rev.Lett.  77, 3865-8(1996); Err. 78,1396(1997)
            M.Ernzerhof, G.E.Scuseria
               J.Chem.Phys. 110, 5029-5036(1999)
          Note that only the exchange functional is in GAMESS.
          PBE has not been tested to the same level as the others.

          Depristo/Kress exchange:
            A.E.DePristo, J.E.Kress  J.Chem.Phys. 86, 1425-1428(1987)

          VWN (meaning specifically VWN5) correlation:
            S.H.Vosko, L.Wilk, M.Nusair
               Can.J.Phys.  58, 1200-1211(1980)
          This paper has five formulae in it, and since the 5th is
          a good quality fit, it states "since formula 5 is easiest
          to implement in LSDA calculations, we recommend its use".

          PWLOC:
            J.D.Perdew, Y.Wang  Phys.Rev. B45, 13244-13249(1992)

          LYP correlation:
            C.Lee, W.Yang, R.G.Parr  Phys.Rev. B37, 785-789(1988)
          For practical purposes this is used in a transformed way,
          involving the square of the density gradient:
            B.Miehlich, A.Savin, H.Stoll, H.Preuss
               Chem.Phys.Lett. 157, 200-206(1989)

          PW91 correlation:   (not presently implemented in GAMESS)
            J.P.Perdew, J.A.Chevray, S.H.Vosko, K.A.Jackson, 
            M.R.Pederson, D.J.Singh, C.Fiolhais
               Phys.Rev.  B46, 6671-6687(1992)

          OP (One-parameter Progressive) correlation:
            T.Tsuneda, K.Hirao  Chem.Phys.Lett.  268, 510-520(1997)
            T.Tsuneda, T.Suzumura, K.Hirao
               J.Chem.Phys.  110, 10664-10678(1999)

          various WIGNER exchange/correlation functionals:
            Q.Zhao, R.G.Parr  Phys.Rev. A46, 5320-5323(1992)

1

          CAMA/CAMB exchange/correlation functionals:
            G.J.Laming, V.Termath, N.C.Handy
               J.Chem.Phys.  99. 8765-8773(1993)

          B3LYP hybrid:
            A.D.Becke  J.Chem.Phys. 98, 5648-5642(1993)
            P.J.Stephens, F.J.Devlin, C.F.Chablowski, M.J.Frisch
               J.Phys.Chem. 98, 11623-11627(1994)
            R.H.Hertwig, W.Koch  Chem.Phys.Lett. 268, 345-351(1997)
          The first paper is actually on B3PW91, never mentioning the
          B3LYP hybrid, and optimizes the mixing of five functionals 
          with PW91 as the correlation GGA.  The second paper then
          proposed use of LYP in place of PW91, without reoptimizing
          the mixing ratios of the hybrid.  The final paper discusses
          the controversy surrounding which VWN functional is used
          in the hybrid.  GAMESS uses VWN5 in its B3LYP hybrid.

          HALF exchange:
            This is programmed as 50% HF plus 50% B88 exchange.
          BHHLYP exchange/correlation:
            This is 50% HF plus 50% B88, with LYP correlation.
          Note: neither is the HALF-AND-HALF exchange/correlation:
            A.D.Becke  J.Chem.Phys.  98, 1372-1377(1993)
          which he defined as 50% HF + 50% SVWN.

             See http://www.dl.ac.uk/DFTlib/contents.html for other
          information about functionals.

             The paper of Johnson, Gill, and Pople listed below has a
          useful summary of formulae, and details about a gradient
          implementation.  A paper on 1st and 2nd derivatives of DFT
          with respect to nuclear coordinates and applied fields is
            A.Komornicki, G.Fitzgerald
               J.Chem.Phys. 98, 1398-1421(1993)

          A few of the many papers assessing the accuracy of DFT:
            B.Miehlich, A.Savin, H.Stoll, H.Preuss
               Chem.Phys.Lett.  157, 200-206(1989)
            B.G.Johnson, P.M.W.Gill, J.A.Pople
               J.Chem.Phys. 98, 5612-5626(1993)
            N.Oliphant, R.J.Bartlett
               J.Chem.Phys. 100, 6550-6561(1994)
            L.A.Curtiss, K.Raghavachari, P.C.Redfern, J.A.Pople
               J.Chem.Phys. 106, 1063-1079(1997)
            E.R.Davidson  Int.J.Quantum Chem. 69, 241-245(1998)
            B.J.Lynch, D.G.Truhlar
               J.Phys.Chem.A  105, 2936-2941(2001)
            R.A.Pascal   J.Phys.Chem.A  105, 9040-9048(2001)
          Of course there are assessments in many of the functional
          papers as well!
 
          On the accuracy of DFT for large molecule thermochemistry:
            L.A.Curtiss, K.Ragavachari, P.C.Redfern, J.A.Pople
              J.Chem.Phys.  112, 7374-7383(2000)
            P.C.Redfern, P.Zapol, L.A.Curtiss, K.Ragavachari
              J.Phys.Chem.A  104, 5850-5854(2000)
 
1

                  Geometry Searches and Internal Coordinates
                  -------- -------- --- -------- -----------
 
             Stationary points are places on the potential energy
          surface with a zero gradient vector (first derivative of
          the energy with respect to nuclear coordinates).  These
          include minima (whether relative or global), better known
          to chemists as reactants, products, and intermediates; as
          well as transition states (also known as saddle points).

             The two types of stationary points have a precise
          mathematical definition, depending on the curvature of the
          potential energy surface at these points.  If all of the
          eigenvalues of the hessian matrix (second derivative
          of the energy with respect to nuclear coordinates) are
          positive, the stationary point is a minimum.  If there is
          one, and only one, negative curvature, the stationary
          point is a transition state.  Points with more than one
          negative curvature do exist, but are not important in
          chemistry.  Because vibrational frequencies are basically 
          the square roots of the curvatures, a minimum has all 
          real frequencies, and a saddle point has one imaginary 
          vibrational "frequency".

             GAMESS locates minima by geometry optimization, as
          RUNTYP=OPTIMIZE, and transition states by saddle point
          searches, as RUNTYP=SADPOINT.  In many ways these are
          similar, and in fact nearly identical FORTRAN code is used
          for both.  The term "geometry search" is used here to
          describe features which are common to both procedures.
          The input to control both RUNTYPs is found in the $STATPT
          group.
 
             As will be noted in the symmetry section below, an
          OPTIMIZE run does not always find a minimum, and a
          SADPOINT run may not find a transtion state, even though
          the gradient is brought to zero.  You can prove you have
          located a minimum or saddle point only by examining the
          local curvatures of the potential energy surface.  This
          can be done by following the geometry search with a
          RUNTYP=HESSIAN job, which should be a matter of routine.
 
                    * * * Quasi-Newton Searches * * *
 
             Geometry searches are most effectively done by what is
          called a quasi-Newton-Raphson procedure.  These methods
          assume a quadratic potential surface, and require the
          exact gradient vector and an approximation to the hessian.
          It is the approximate nature of the hessian that makes the
          method "quasi".  The rate of convergence of the geometry
          search depends on how quadratic the real surface is, and
          the quality of the hessian.  The latter is something you
          have control over, and is discussed in the next section.
 
1
 
             GAMESS contains different implementations of quasi-
          Newton procedures for finding stationary points, namely
          METHOD=NR, RFO, QA, and the seldom used SCHLEGEL.  They
          differ primarily in how the step size and direction are
          controlled, and how the Hessian is updated.  The CONOPT
          method is a way of forcing a geometry away from a minimum
          towards a TS.  It is not a quasi-Newton method, and is
          described at the very end of this section.
             
             The NR method employs a straight Newton-Raphson step.
          There is no step size control, the algorithm will simply
          try to locate the nearest stationary point, which may be a
          minimum, a TS, or any higher order saddle point.  NR is
          not intended for general use, but is used by GAMESS in
          connection with some of the other methods after they have
          homed in on a stationary point, and by Gradient Extremal
          runs where location of higher order saddle points is 
          common.  NR requires a very good estimate of the geometry
          in order to converge on the desired stationary point.

             The RFO and QA methods are two different versions of
          the so-called augmented Hessian techniques.  They both 
          employ Hessian shift parameter(s) in order to control the
          step length and direction. 

             In the RFO method, the shift parameter is determined by 
          approximating the PES with a Rational Function, instead of
          a second order Taylor expansion.  For a RUNTYP=SADPOINT, 
          the TS direction is treated separately, giving two shift 
          parameters.  This is known as a Partitioned Rational 
          Function Optimization (P-RFO).  The shift parameter(s)
          ensure that the augmented Hessian has the correct eigen-
          value structure, all positive for a minimum search, and
          one negative eigenvalue for a TS search.  The (P)-RFO step
          can have any length, but if it exceeds DXMAX, the step is
          simply scaled down.

             In the QA (Quadratic Approximation) method, the shift 
          parameter is determined by the requirement that the step
          size should equal DXMAX.  There is only one shift
          parameter for both minima and TS searches.  Again the
          augmented Hessian will have the correct structure.  There
          is another way of describing the same algorithm, namely as
          a minimization on the "image" potential.  The latter is
          known as TRIM (Trust Radius Image Minimization).  The
          working equation is identical in these two methods.

             When the RFO steplength is close to DXMAX, there is
          little difference between the RFO and QA methods.  However,
          the RFO step may in some cases exceed DXMAX significantly,
          and a simple scaling of the step will usually not produce
          the best direction.  The QA step is the best step on the
          hypersphere with radius DXMAX.  For this reason QA is the
          default algorithm.

1
 
             Near a stationary point the straight NR algorithm is
          the most efficient.  The RFO and QA may be viewed as
          methods for guiding the search in the "correct" direction
          when starting far from the stationary point.  Once the
          stationary point is approached, the RFO and QA methods
          switch to NR, automatically, when the NR steplength drops
          below 0.10 or DXMAX, whichever is the smallest.
 
             The QA method works so well that we use it exclusively,
          and so the SCHLEGEL method will probably be omitted from
          some future version of GAMESS.

             You should read the papers mentioned below in order to
          understand how these methods are designed to work.  The
          first 3 papers describe the RFO and TRIM/QA algorithms
          A good but somewhat dated summary of various search
          procedures is given by Bell and Crighton, and see also the
          review by Schlegel.  Most of the FORTRAN code for geometry
          searches, and some of the discussion in this section was
          written by Frank Jensen of Odense University, whose paper
          compares many of the algorithms implemented in GAMESS:
 
             1. J.Baker  J.Comput.Chem. 7, 385-395(1986)
             2. T.Helgaker  Chem.Phys.Lett. 182, 305-310(1991)
             3. P.Culot, G.Dive, V.H.Nguyen, J.M.Ghuysen
                Theoret.Chim.Acta  82, 189-205(1992)
             4. H.B.Schlegel  J.Comput.Chem. 3, 214-218(1982)
             5. S.Bell, J.S.Crighton
                J.Chem.Phys. 80, 2464-2475(1984).
             6. H.B.Schlegel  Advances in Chemical Physics (Ab Initio
                Methods in Quantum Chemistry, Part I), volume 67,
                K.P.Lawley, Ed.  Wiley, New York, 1987, pp 249-286.
             7. F.Jensen  J.Chem.Phys. 102, 6706-6718(1995).
 
                          * * * the Hessian * * *
 
             Although quasi-Newton methods require only an
          approximation to the true hessian, the choice of this
          matrix has a great affect on convergence of the geometry
          search.  
 
             There is a procedure contained within GAMESS for
          guessing a diagonal, positive definite hessian matrix,
          HESS=GUESS.  If you are using Cartesian coordinates, the
          guess hessian is 1/3 times the unit matrix.  The guess is 
          more sophisticated when internal coordinates are defined, 
          as empirical rules will be used to estimate stretching 
          and bending force constants.  Other force constants are set
          to 1/4.  The diagonal guess often works well for minima, 
          but cannot possibly find transition states (because it is 
          positive definite).  Therefore, GUESS may not be selected 
          for SADPOINT runs.
 
1

             Two options for providing a more accurate hessian are
          HESS=READ and CALC.  For the latter, the true hessian is
          obtained by direct calculation at the initial geometry,
          and then the geometry search begins, all in one run.  The
          READ option allows you to feed in the hessian in a $HESS
          group, as obtained by a RUNTYP=HESSIAN job.  The second
          procedure is actually preferable, as you get a chance to
          see the frequencies.  Then, if the local curvatures look
          good, you can commit to the geometry search.  Be sure to
          include a $GRAD group (if the exact gradient is available)
          in the HESS=READ job so that GAMESS can take its first step 
          immediately.
 
             Note also that you can compute the hessian at a lower
          basis set and/or wavefunction level, and read it into a
          higher level geometry search.  In fact, the $HESS group 
          could be obtained at the semiempirical level.  This trick 
          works because the hessian is 3Nx3N for N atoms, no matter 
          what atomic basis is used.  The gradient from the lower 
          level is of course worthless, as the geometry search must 
          work with the exact gradient of the wavefunction and basis 
          set in current use.  Discard the $GRAD group from the 
          lower level calculation!
 
             You often get what you pay for.  HESS=GUESS is free,
          but may lead to significantly more steps in the geometry
          search.  The other two options are more expensive at the
          beginning, but may pay back by rapid convergence to the
          stationary point.
 
             The hessian update frequently improves the hessian for a 
          few steps (especially for HESS=GUESS), but then breaks down.
          The symptoms are a nice lowering of the energy or the RMS
          gradient for maybe 10 steps, followed by crazy steps.  You
          can help by putting the best coordinates into $DATA, and
          resubmitting, to make a fresh determination of the hessian.

             The default hessian update for OPTIMIZE runs is BFGS, 
          which is likely to remain positive definite.  The POWELL
          update is the default for SADPOINT runs, since the hessian
          can develop a negative curvature as the search progresses.
          The POWELL update is also used by the METHOD=NR and CONOPT
          since the Hessian may have any number of negative eigen-
          values in these cases.  The MSP update is a mixture of
          Murtagh-Sargent and Powell, suggested by Josep Bofill,
          (J.Comput.Chem., 15, 1-11, 1994).  It sometimes works
          slightly better than Powell, so you may want to try it.
 
1

                      * * * Coordinate Choices * * *
        
             Optimization in cartesian coordinates has a reputation
          of converging slowly.  This is largely due to the fact
          that translations and rotations are usually left in the
          problem.  Numerical problems caused by the small eigen-
          values associated with these degrees of freedom are the 
          source of this poor convergence.  The methods in GAMESS
          project the hessian matrix to eliminate these degrees of
          freedom, which should not cause a problem.  Nonetheless,
          Cartesian coordinates are in general the most slowly
          convergent coordinate system.

             The use of internal coordinates (see NZVAR in $CONTRL 
          as well as $ZMAT) also eliminates the six rotational and
          translational degrees of freedom.  Also, when internal 
          coordinates are used, the GUESS hessian is able to use 
          empirical information about bond stretches and bends.
          On the other hand, there are many possible choices for the 
          internal coordinates, and some of these may lead to much 
          poorer convergence of the geometry search than others.  
          Particularly poorly chosen coordinates may not even 
          correspond to a quadratic surface, thereby ending all hope 
          that a quasi-Newton method will converge.
 
             Internal coordinates are frequently strongly coupled.
          Because of this, Jerry Boatz has called them "infernal
          coordinates"!  A very common example to illustrate this
          might be a bond length in a ring, and the angle on the
          opposite side of the ring.  Clearly, changing one changes
          the other simultaneously.  A more mathematical definition
          of "coupled" is to say that there is a large off-diagonal
          element in the hessian.  In this case convergence may be
          unsatisfactory, especially with a diagonal GUESS hessian,
          where a "good" set of internals is one with a diagonally
          dominant hessian.  Of course, if you provide an accurately
          computed hessian, it will have large off-diagonal values
          where those are truly present.  Even so, convergence may
          be poor if the coordinates are coupled through large 3rd
          or higher derivatives.  The best coordinates are therefore
          those which are the most "quadratic".

             One very popular set of internal coordinates is the
          usual "model builder" Z-matrix input, where for N atoms,
          one uses N-1 bond lengths, N-2 bond angles, and N-3 bond
          torsions.  The popularity of this choice is based on its
          ease of use in specifying the initial molecular geometry.
          Typically, however, it is the worst possible choice of
          internal coordinates, and in the case of rings, is not
          even as good as Cartesian coordinates.
 
1
 
             However, GAMESS does not require this particular mix 
          of the common types.  GAMESS' only requirement is that you
          use a total of 3N-6 coordinates, chosen from these 3 basic 
          types, or several more exotic possibilities.  (Of course, 
          we mean 3N-5 throughout for linear molecules).  These
          additional types of internal coordinates include linear
          bends for 3 collinear atoms, out of plane bends, and so on.
          There is no reason at all why you should place yourself in
          a straightjacket of N-1 bonds, N-2 angles, and N-3 torsions.
          If the molecule has symmetry, be sure to use internals
          which are symmetrically related.  

             For example, the most effective choice of coordinates
          for the atoms in a four membered ring is to define all
          four sides, any one of the internal angles, and a dihedral
          defining the ring pucker.  For a six membered ring, the
          best coordinates seem to be 6 sides, 3 angles, and 3
          torsions.  The angles should be every other internal
          angle, so that the molecule can "breathe" freely.  The
          torsions should be arranged so that the central bond of
          each is placed on alternating bonds of the ring, as if
          they were pi bonds in Kekule benzene.  For a five membered
          ring, we suggest all 5 sides, 2 internal angles, again
          alternating every other one, and 2 dihedrals to fill in.
          The internal angles of necessity skip two atoms where the
          ring closes.  Larger rings should generalize on the idea
          of using all sides but only alternating angles.  If there
          are fused rings, start with angles on the fused bond, and
          alternate angles as you go around from this position.
 
             Rings and more especially fused rings can be tricky.
          For these systems, especially, we suggest the Cadillac of
          internal coordinates, the "natural internal coordinates"
          of Peter Pulay.  For a description of these, see

                P.Pulay, G.Fogarosi, F.Pang, J.E.Boggs,
                    J.Am.Chem.Soc. 101, 2550-2560 (1979).
                G.Fogarasi, X.Zhou, P.W.Taylor, P.Pulay
                    J.Am.Chem.Soc. 114, 8191-8201 (1992).

          These are linear combinations of local coordinates, except
          in the case of rings.  The examples given in these two
          papers are very thorough.

             An illustration of these types of coordinates is given
          in the example job EXAM25.INP, distributed with GAMESS.
          This is a nonsense molecule, designed to show many kinds
          of functional groups.  It is defined using standard bond
          distances with a classical Z-matrix input, and the angles
          in the ring are adjusted so that the starting value of
          the unclosed OO bond is also a standard value.

1

             Using Cartesian coordinates is easiest, but takes a very
          large number of steps to converge.  This however, is better
          than using the classical Z-matrix internals given in $DATA,
          which is accomplished by setting NZVAR to the correct 3N-6
          value.  The geometry search changes the OO bond length to
          a very short value on the 1st step, and the SCF fails to 
          converge.  (Note that if you have used dummy atoms in the
          $DATA input, you cannot simply enter NZVAR to optimize in
          internal coordinates, instead you must give a $ZMAT which
          involves only real atoms).

             The third choice of internal coordinates is the best set
          which can be made from the simple coordinates.  It follows
          the advice given above for five membered rings, and because
          it includes the OO bond, has no trouble with crashing this
          bond.  It takes 20 steps to converge, so the trouble of 
          generating this $ZMAT is certainly worth it compared to the
          use of Cartesians.

             Natural internal coordinates are defined in the final 
          group of input.  The coordinates are set up first for the
          ring, including two linear combinations of all angles and 
          all torsions withing the ring.  After this the methyl is
          hooked to the ring as if it were a NH group, using the
          usual terminal methyl hydrogen definitions.  The H is 
          hooked to this same ring carbon as if it were a methine.
          The NH and the CH2 within the ring follow Pulay's rules
          exactly.  The amount of input is much greater than a normal
          Z-matrix.  For example, 46 internal coordinates are given,
          which are then placed in 3N-6=33 linear combinations.  Note
          that natural internals tend to be rich in bends, and short
          on torsions.

             The energy results for the three coordinate systems 
          which converge are as follows:

            NSERCH    Cart          good Z-mat        nat. int.
             0   -48.6594935049   -48.6594935049   -48.6594935049 
             1   -48.6800538676   -48.6806631261   -48.6838361406 
             2   -48.6822702585   -48.6510215698   -48.6874045449 
             3   -48.6858299354   -48.6882945647   -48.6932811528 
             4   -48.6881499412   -48.6849667085   -48.6946836332 
             5   -48.6890226067   -48.6911899936   -48.6959800274 
             6   -48.6898261650   -48.6878047907   -48.6973821465 
             7   -48.6901936624   -48.6930608185   -48.6987652146 
             8   -48.6905304889   -48.6940607117   -48.6996366016 
             9   -48.6908626791   -48.6949137185   -48.7006656309 
            10   -48.6914279465   -48.6963767038   -48.7017273728 
            11   -48.6921521142   -48.6986608776   -48.7021504975 
            12   -48.6931136707   -48.7007305310   -48.7022405019 
            13   -48.6940437619   -48.7016095285   -48.7022548935 

1

            14   -48.6949546487   -48.7021531692   -48.7022569328 
            15   -48.6961698826   -48.7022080183   -48.7022570260 
            16   -48.6973813002   -48.7022454522   -48.7022570662
            17   -48.6984850655   -48.7022492840  
            18   -48.6991553826   -48.7022503853  
            19   -48.6996239136   -48.7022507037  
            20   -48.7002269303   -48.7022508393  
            21   -48.7005379631
            22   -48.7008387759
                        ...
            50   -48.7022519950 

          from which you can see that the natural internals are
          actually the best set.  The $ZMAT exhibits upward burps
          in the energy at step 2, 4, and 6, so that for the
          same number of steps, these coordinates are always at a
          higher energy than the natural internals.

             The initial hessian generated for these three columns
          contains 0, 33, and 46 force constants.  This assists
          the natural internals, but is not the major reason for
          its superior performance.  The computed hessian at the
          final geometry of this molecule, when transformed into the
          natural internal coordinates is almost diagonal.  This
          almost complete uncoupling of coordinates is what makes
          the natural internals perform so well.  The conclusion
          is of course that not all coordinate systems are equal, 
          and natural internals are the best.  As another example,
          we have run the ATCHCP molecule, which is a popular
          geometry optimization test, due to its two fused rings:

          H.B.Schlegel, Int.J.Quantum Chem., Symp. 26, 253-264(1992)
          T.H.Fischer and J.Almlof, J.Phys.Chem. 96, 9768-9774(1992)
          J.Baker, J.Comput.Chem. 14, 1085-1100(1993)

          Here we have compared the same coordinate types, using a 
          guess hessian, or a computed hessian.  The latter set of
          runs is a test of the coordinates only, as the initial 
          hessian information is identical.  The results show clearly
          the superiority of the natural internals, which like the 
          previous example, give an energy decrease on every step:

                               HESS=GUESS   HESS=READ
          Cartesians               65          41 steps
          good Z-matrix            32          23
          natural internals        24          13
 
          A final example is phosphinoazasilatrane, with three rings
          fused on a common SiN bond, in which 112 steps in Cartesian
          space became 32 steps in natural internals.  The moral is:

              "A little brain time can save a lot of CPU time."

1

             In late 1998, a new kind of internal coordinate method
         was included into GAMESS.  This is the delocalized internal
         coordinate (DLC) of
               J.Baker, A. Kessi, B.Delley
               J.Chem.Phys. 105, 192-212(1996)
         although as is the usual case, the implementation is not
         exactly the same.  Bonds are kept as independent coordinates,
         while angles are placed in linear combination by the DLC
         process.  There are some interesting options for applying
         constraints, and other options to assist the automatic DLC
         generation code by either adding or deleting coordinates.
         It is simple to use DLCs in their most basic form:
          $contrl nzvar=xx $end
          $zmat   dlc=.true. auto=.true. $end
         Our initial experience is that the quality of DLCs is 
         not as good as explicitly constructed natural internals,
         which benefit from human chemical knowledge, but are almost
         always better than carefully crafted $ZMATs using only the
         primitive internal coordinates (although we have seen a few
         exceptions).  Once we have more numerical experience with
         the use of DLC's, we will come back and revise the above
         discussion of coordinate choices.  In the meantime, they
         are quite simple to choose, so give them a go.
 
1
 
                       * * * The Role of Symmetry * * *
 
             At the end of a succesful geometry search, you will
          have a set of coordinates where the gradient of the energy
          is zero.  However your newly discovered stationary point 
          is not necessarily a minimum or saddle point!
 
             This apparent mystery is due to the fact that the
          gradient vector transforms under the totally symmetric
          representation of the molecular point group.  As a direct
          consequence, a geometry search is point group conserving.
          (For a proof of these statements, see J.W.McIver and
          A.Komornicki, Chem.Phys.Lett., 10,303-306(1971)).  In
          simpler terms, the molecule will remain in whatever point
          group you select in $DATA, even if the true minimum is in
          some lower point group.  Since a geometry search only
          explores totally symmetric degrees of freedom, the only
          way to learn about the curvatures for all degrees of
          freedom is RUNTYP=HESSIAN.
 
             As an example, consider disilene, the silicon analog
          of ethene.  It is natural to assume that this molecule is
          planar like ethene, and an OPTIMIZE run in D2h symmetry
          will readily locate a stationary point.  However, as a
          calculation of the hessian will readily show, this
          structure is a transition state (one imaginary frequency),
          and the molecule is really trans-bent (C2h).  A careful
          worker will always characterize a stationary point as
          either a minimum, a transition state, or some higher order
          stationary point (which is not of great interest!) by
          performing a RUNTYP=HESSIAN.

             The point group conserving properties of a geometry
          search can be annoying, as in the preceeding example, or
          advantageous.  For example, assume you wish to locate the
          transition state for rotation about the double bond in
          ethene.  A little thought will soon reveal that ethene is
          D2h, the 90 degrees twisted structure is D2d, and
          structures in between are D2.  Since the saddle point is
          actually higher symmetry than the rest of the rotational
          surface, you can locate it by RUNTYP=OPTIMIZE within D2d
          symmetry.  You can readily find this stationary point with
          the diagonal guess hessian!  In fact, if you attempt to do
          a RUNTYP=SADPOINT within D2d symmetry, there will be no
          totally symmetric modes with negative curvatures, and it
          is unlikely that the geometry search will be very well
          behaved.
 
             Although a geometry search cannot lower the symmetry,
          the gain of symmetry is quite possible.  For example, if
          you initiate a water molecule optimization with a trial
          structure which has unequal bond lengths, the geometry
          search will come to a structure that is indeed C2v (to
          within OPTTOL, anyway).  However, GAMESS leaves it up to
          you to realize that a gain of symmetry has occurred.
 
1
 
             In general, Mother Nature usually chooses more
          symmetrical structures over less symmetrical structures.
          Therefore you are probably better served to assume the
          higher symmetry, perform the geometry search, and then
          check the stationary point's curvatures.  The alternative
          is to start with artificially lower symmetry and see if
          your system regains higher symmetry.  The problem with
          this approach is that you don't necessarily know which
          subgroup is appropriate, and you lose the great speedups
          GAMESS can obtain from proper use of symmetry.  It is good
          to note here that "lower symmetry" does not mean simply
          changing the name of the point group and entering more
          atoms in $DATA, instead the nuclear coordinates themselves
          must actually be of lower symmetry.
 
                         * * * Practical Matters * * *
 
             Geometry searches do not bring the gradient exactly to
          zero.  Instead they stop when the largest component of the
          gradient is below the value of OPTTOL, which defaults to
          a reasonable 0.0001.   Analytic hessians usually have
          residual frequencies below 10 cm**-1 with this degree of
          optimization.  The sloppiest value you probably ever want
          to try is 0.0005.
 
             If a geometry search runs out of time, or exceeds
          NSTEP, it can be restarted.  For RUNTYP=OPTIMIZE, restart
          with the coordinates having the lowest total energy
          (do a string search on "FINAL").  For RUNTYP=SADPOINT, 
          restart with the coordinates having the smallest gradient
          (do a string search on "RMS", which means root mean square).
          These are not necessarily at the last geometry!

             The "restart" should actually be a normal run, that is
          you should not try to use the restart options in $CONTRL
          (which may not work anyway).  A geometry search can be
          restarted by extracting the desired coordinates for $DATA
          from the printout, and by extracting the corresponding
          $GRAD group from the PUNCH file.  If the $GRAD group is
          supplied, the program is able to save the time it would
          ordinarily take to compute the wavefunction and gradient
          at the initial point, which can be a substantial savings.
          There is no input to trigger reading of a $GRAD group: if
          found, it is read and used.  Be careful that your $GRAD
          group actually corresponds to the coordinates in $DATA, as
          GAMESS has no check for this.
 
             Sometimes when you are fairly close to the minimum, an
          OPTIMIZE run will take a first step which raises the
          energy, with subsequent steps improving the energy and
          perhaps finding the minimum.  The erratic first step is
          caused by the GUESS hessian.  It may help to limit the size
          of this wrong first step, by reducing its radius, DXMAX.
          Conversely, if you are far from the minimum, sometimes you
          can decrease the number of steps by increasing DXMAX.

1
 
             When using internals, the program uses an iterative 
          process to convert the internal coordinate change into 
          Cartesian space.  In some cases, a small change in the
          internals will produce a large change in Cartesians, and
          thus produce a warning message on the output.  If these
          warnings appear only in the beginning, there is probably 
          no problem, but if they persist you can probably devise
          a better set of coordinates.  You may in fact have one of
          the two problems described in the next paragraph.  In
          some cases (hopefully very few) the iterations to find
          the Cartesian displacement may not converge, producing a
          second kind of warning message.  The fix for this may 
          very well be a new set of internal coordinates as well,
          or adjustment of ITBMAT in $STATPT.
 
             There are two examples of poorly behaved internal 
          coordinates which can give serious problems.  The first
          of these is three angles around a central atom, when
          this atom becomes planar (sum of the angles nears 360).
          The other is a dihedral where three of the atoms are 
          nearly linear, causing the dihedral to flip between 0 and
          180.  Avoid these two situations if you want your geometry
          search to be convergent.

             Sometimes it is handy to constrain the geometry search
          by freezing one or more coordinates, via the IFREEZ array.
          For example, constrained optimizations may be useful while
          trying to determine what area of a potential energy surface 
          contains a saddle point.  If you try to freeze coordinates
          with an automatically generated $ZMAT, you need to know
          that the order of the coordinates defined in $DATA is

                y
                y  x r1
                y  x r2  x a3
                y  x r4  x a5  x w6
                y  x r7  x a8  x w9

          and so on, where y and x are whatever atoms and molecular
          connectivity you happen to be using.

1

                         * * * Saddle Points * * *
 
             Finding minima is relatively easy.  There are large
          tables of bond lengths and angles, so guessing starting
          geometries is pretty straightforward.  Very nasty cases
          may require computation of an exact hessian, but the
          location of most minima is straightforward.
 
             In contrast, finding saddle points is a black art.
          The diagonal guess hessian will never work, so you must
          provide a computed one.  The hessian should be computed at
          your best guess as to what the transition state (T.S.) 
          should be.  It is safer to do this in two steps as outlined 
          above, rather than HESS=CALC.  This lets you verify you 
          have guessed a structure with one and only one negative
          curvature.  Guessing a good trial structure is the hardest
          part of a RUNTYP=SADPOINT!

             This point is worth iterating.  Even with sophisticated
          step size control such as is offered by the QA/TRIM or RFO
          methods, it is in general very difficult to move correctly
          from a region with incorrect curvatures towards a saddle
          point.  Even procedures such as CONOPT or RUNTYP=GRADEXTR
          will not replace your own chemical intuition about where
          saddle points may be located.
 
             The RUNTYP=HESSIAN's normal coordinate analysis is
          rigorously valid only at stationary points on the surface.
          This means the frequencies from the hessian at your trial
          geometry are untrustworthy, in particular the six "zero"
          frequencies corresponding to translational and rotational
          (T&R) degrees of freedom will usually be 300-500 cm**-1,
          and possibly imaginary.  The Sayvetz conditions on the
          printout will help you distinguish the T&R "contaminants"
          from the real vibrational modes.  If you have defined a
          $ZMAT, the PURIFY option within $STATPT will help zap out 
          these T&R contaminants).
 
             If the hessian at your assumed geometry does not have
          one and only one imaginary frequency (taking into account
          that the "zero" frequencies can sometimes be 300i!), then
          it will probably be difficult to find the saddle point.
          Instead you need to compute a hessian at a better guess
          for the initial geometry, or read about mode following
          below.
 
             If you need to restart your run, do so with the
          coordinates which have the smallest RMS gradient.  Note
          that the energy does not necessarily have to decrease in a
          SADPOINT run, in contrast to an OPTIMIZE run.  It is often
          necessary to do several restarts, involving recomputation
          of the hessian, before actually locating the saddle point.

1

             Assuming you do find the T.S., it is always a good
          idea to recompute the hessian at this structure.  As
          described in the discussion of symmetry, only totally
          symmetric vibrational modes are probed in a geometry
          search.  Thus it is fairly common to find that at your
          "T.S." there is a second imaginary frequency, which
          corresponds to a non-totally symmetric vibration.  This
          means you haven't found the correct T.S., and are back to
          the drawing board.  The proper procedure is to lower the
          point group symmetry by distorting along the symmetry
          breaking "extra" imaginary mode, by a reasonable amount.
          Don't be overly timid in the amount of distortion, or the
          next run will come back to the invalid structure.

             The real trick here is to find a good guess for the
          transition structure.  The closer you are, the better.  It
          is often difficult to guess these structures.  One way
          around this is to compute a linear least motion (LLM)
          path.  This connects the reactant structure to the product
          structure by linearly varying each coordinate.  If you
          generate about ten structures intermediate to reactants
          and products, and compute the energy at each point, you
          will in general find that the energy first goes up, and
          then down.  The maximum energy structure is a "good" guess
          for the true T.S. structure.  Actually, the success of
          this method depends on how curved the reaction path is.
 
             A particularly good paper on the symmetry which a
          saddle point (and reaction path) can possess is by
             P.Pechukas, J.Chem.Phys. 64, 1516-1521(1976)
 

                          * * * Mode Following * * *

             In certain circumstances, METHOD=RFO and QA can walk
          from a region of all positive curvatures (i.e. near a
          minimum) to a transition state.  The criteria for whether
          this will work is that the mode being followed should be
          only weakly coupled to other close-lying Hessian modes.
          Especially, the coupling to lower modes should be almost
          zero.  In practise this means that the mode being followed
          should be the lowest of a given symmetry, or spatially far
          away from lower modes (for example, rotation of methyl
          groups at different ends of the molecule). It is certainly
          possible to follow also modes which do not obey these
          criteria, but the resulting walk (and possibly TS location)
          will be extremely sensitive to small details such as the
          stepsize.

             This sensitivity also explain why TS searches often
          fail, even when starting in a region where the Hessian has
          the required one negative eigenvalue.  If the TS mode is
          strongly coupled to other modes, the direction of the mode
          is incorrect, and the maximization of the energy along
          that direction is not really what you want (but what you
          get).

1

             Mode following is really not a substitute for the
          ability to intuit regions of the PES with a single local
          negative curvature.  When you start near a minimum, it
          matters a great deal which side of the minima you start
          from, as the direction of the search depends on the sign
          of the gradient.  We strongly urge that you read before
          trying to use IFOLOW, namely the papers by Frank Jensen
          and Jon Baker mentioned above, and see also Figure 3 of
          C.J.Tsai, K.D.Jordan, J.Phys.Chem. 97, 11227-11237 (1993)
          which is quite illuminating on the sensitivity of mode
          following to the initial geometry point.

             Note that GAMESS retains all degrees of freedom in its
          hessian, and thus there is no reason to suppose the lowest
          mode is totally symmetric. Remember to lower the symmetry
          in the input deck if you want to follow non-symmetric 
          modes.  You can get a printout of the modes in internal
          coordinate space by a EXETYP=CHECK run, which will help
          you decide on the value of IFOLOW.

                                    * * *

             CONOPT is a different sort of saddle point search
          procedure.  Here a certain "CONstrained OPTimization" may
          be considered as another mode following method.  The idea
          is to start from a minimum, and then perform a series of
          optimizations on hyperspheres of increasingly larger
          radii.  The initial step is taken along one of the Hessian
          modes, chosen by IFOLOW, and the geometry is optimized
          subject to the constraint that the distance to the minimum
          is constant.  The convergence criteria for the gradient
          norm perpendicular to the constraint is taken as 10*OPTTOL,
          and the corresponding steplength as 100*OPTTOL.

             After such a hypersphere optimization has converged, a
          step is taken along the line connecting the two previous
          optimized points to get an estimate of the next hyper-
          sphere geometry.  The stepsize is DXMAX, and the radius of
          hyperspheres is thus increased by an amount close (but not
          equal) to DXMAX.  Once the pure NR step size falls below
          DXMAX/2 or 0.10 (whichever is the largest) the algorithm
          switches to a straight NR iterate to (hopefully) converge
          on the stationary point.

             The current implementation always conducts the search 
          in cartesian coordinates, but internal coordinates may be
          printed by the usual specification of NZVAR and ZMAT.  At
          present there is no restart option programmed.

             CONOPT is based on the following papers, but the actual
          implementation is the modified equations presented in
          Frank Jensen's paper mentioned above.
	  Y. Abashkin, N. Russo,  J.Chem.Phys. 100, 4477-4483(1994).
	  Y. Abashkin, N. Russo, M. Toscano,
              Int.J.Quant.Chem.  52, 695-704(1994).

             There is little experience on how this method works in
          practice, experiment with it at your own risk!

1
 
                             IRC methods
                             --- -------
 
              The Intrinsic Reaction Coordinate (IRC) is defined as
          the minimum energy path connecting the reactants to products
          via the transition state.  In practice, the IRC is found by
          first locating the transition state for the reaction.  The
          IRC is then found in halves, going forward and backwards
          from the saddle point, down the steepest descent path in
          mass weighted Cartesian coordinates.  This is accomplished
          by numerical integration of the IRC equations, by a variety
          of methods to be described below.
 
              The IRC is becoming an important part of polyatomic
          dynamics research, as it is hoped that only knowledge of the
          PES in the vicinity of the IRC is needed for prediction of
          reaction rates, at least at threshhold energies.  The IRC
          has a number of uses for electronic structure purposes as
          well.  These include the proof that a certain transition
          structure does indeed connect a particular set of reactants
          and products, as the structure and imaginary frequency
          normal mode at the saddle point do not always unambiguously
          identify the reactants and products.  The study of the
          electronic and geometric structure along the IRC is also of
          interest.  For example, one can obtain localized orbitals
          along the path to determine when bonds break or form.
 
              The accuracy to which the IRC is determined is dictated
          by the use one intends for it.  Dynamical calculations
          require a very accurate determination of the path, as
          derivative information (second derivatives of the PES at
          various IRC points, and path curvature) is required later.
          Thus, a sophisticated integration method (such as AMPC4 or
          RK4), and small step sizes (STRIDE=0.05, 0.01, or even
          smaller) may be needed.  In addition to this, care should
          be taken to locate the transition state carefully (perhaps
          decreasing OPTTOL by a factor of 10), and in the initiation
          of the IRC run.  The latter might require a hessian matrix
          obtained by double differencing, certainly the hessian
          should be PURIFY'd.  Note also that EVIB must be chosen
          carefully, as decribed below.
 
              On the other hand, identification of reactants and
          products allows for much larger step sizes, and cruder
          integration methods.  In this type of IRC one might want to
          be careful in leaving the saddle point (perhaps STRIDE
          should be reduced to 0.10 or 0.05 for the first few steps
          away from the transition state), but once a few points have
          been taken, larger step sizes can be employed.  In general,
          the defaults in the $IRC group are set up for this latter,
          cruder quality IRC.  The STRIDE value for the GS2 method
          can usually be safely larger than for other methods, no 
          matter what your interest in accuracy is. 
 
1
 
               The simplest method of determining an IRC is linear
          gradient following, PACE=LINEAR.  This method is also known
          as Euler's method.  If you are employing PACE=LINEAR, you
          can select "stabilization" of the reaction path by the
          Ishida, Morokuma, Komornicki method.  This type of corrector
          has no apparent mathematical basis, but works rather well
          since the bisector usually intersects the reaction path at
          right angles (for small step sizes).  The ELBOW variable
          allows for a method intermediate to LINEAR and stabilized
          LINEAR, in that the stabilization will be skipped if the
          gradients at the original IRC point, and at the result of a
          linear prediction step form an angle greater than ELBOW.
          Set ELBOW=180 to always perform the stabilization.
 
               A closely related method is PACE=QUAD, which fits a
          quadratic polynomial to the gradient at the current and
          immediately previous IRC point to predict the next point.
          This pace has the same computational requirement as LINEAR,
          and is slightly more accurate due to the reuse of the old
          gradient.  However, stabilization is not possible for this
          pace, thus a stabilized LINEAR path is usually more accurate
          than QUAD.
 
              Two rather more sophisticated methods for integrating
          the IRC equations are the fourth order Adams-Moulton
          predictor-corrector (PACE=AMPC4) and fourth order Runge-
          Kutta (PACE=RK4).  AMPC4 takes a step towards the next IRC
          point (prediction), and based on the gradient found at this
          point (in the near vincinity of the next IRC point) obtains
          a modified step to the desired IRC point (correction).
          AMPC4 uses variable step sizes, based on the input STRIDE.
          RK4 takes several steps part way toward the next IRC point,
          and uses the gradient at these points to predict the next
          IRC point.  RK4 is the most accurate integration method
          implemented in GAMESS, and is also the most time consuming.

              The Gonzalez-Schlegel 2nd order method finds the next
          IRC point by a constrained optimization on the surface of
          a hypersphere, centered at 1/2 STRIDE along the gradient
          vector leading from the previous IRC point.  By construction,
          the reaction path between two successive IRC points is
          thus a circle tangent to the two gradient vectors.  The
          algorithm is much more robust for large steps than the other
          methods, so it has been chosen as the default method.  Thus,
          the default for STRIDE is too large for the other methods.  
          The number of energy and gradients need to find the next 
          point varies with the difficulty of the constrained 
          optimization, but is normally not very many points.  Be sure 
          to provide the updated hessian from the previous run when 
          restarting PACE=GS2.
          
1

              The number of wavefunction evaluations, and energy
          gradients needed to jump from one point on the IRC to the next
          point are summarized in the following table:
 
               PACE      # energies   # gradients
               ----      ----------   -----------
              LINEAR        1             1
          stabilized
              LINEAR        3             2
              QUAD          1             1  (+ reuse of historical
                                                      gradient)
              AMPC4         2             2  (see note)
              RK4           4             4
              GS2          2-4           2-4 (equal numbers)
 
          Note that the AMPC4 method sometimes does more than one
          correction step, with each such corection adding one more
          energy and gradient to the calculation.  You get what you
          pay for in IRC calculations:  the more energies and
          gradients which are used, the more accurate the path found.

              A description of these methods, as well as some others
          that were found to be not as good is geven by Kim Baldridge
          and Lisa Pederson, Pi Mu Epsilon Journal, 9, 513-521 (1993).
 

                                   * * * 

              All methods are initiated by jumping from the saddle
          point, parallel to the normal mode (CMODE) which has an
          imaginary frequency.  The jump taken is designed to lower
          the energy by an amount EVIB.  The actual distance taken is
          thus a function of the imaginary frequency, as a smaller
          FREQ will produce a larger initial jump.  You can simply
          provide a $HESS group instead of CMODE and FREQ, which
          involves less typing.  To find out the actual step taken for
          a given EVIB, use EXETYP=CHECK.  The direction of the jump
          (towards reactants or products) is governed by FORWRD.  Note
          that if you have decided to use small step sizes, you must
          employ a smaller EVIB to ensure a small first step.  The
          GS2 method begins by following the normal mode by one half
          of STRIDE, and then performing a hypersphere minimization
          about that point, so EVIB is irrelevant to this PACE.
 
              The only method which proves that a properly converged
          IRC has been obtained is to regenerate the IRC with a
          smaller step size, and check that the IRC is unchanged.
          Again, note that the care with which an IRC must be obtained
          is highly dependent on what use it is intended for.
 
1
 
              Some key IRC references are:
          K.Ishida, K.Morokuma, A.Komornicki
                J.Chem.Phys.  66, 2153-2156 (1977)
          K.Muller
                Angew.Chem., Int.Ed.Engl.19, 1-13 (1980)
          M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon, M.Dupuis
                J.Am.Chem.Soc.  107, 2585-2589 (1985)
          B.C.Garrett, M.J.Redmon, R.Steckler, D.G.Truhlar,
          K.K.Baldridge, D.Bartol, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
                J.Phys.Chem.  92, 1476-1488(1988)
          K.K.Baldridge, M.S.Gordon, R.Steckler, D.G.Truhlar
                J.Phys.Chem.  93, 5107-5119(1989)
          C.Gonzales, H.B.Schlegel
                J.Chem.Phys.  90, 2154-2161(1989)
                
 
 
              The IRC discussion closes with some practical tips:
 
              The $IRC group has a confusing array of variables, but
          fortunately very little thought need be given to most of
          them.  An IRC run is restarted by moving the coordinates of
          the next predicted IRC point into $DATA, and inserting the
          new $IRC group into your input file.  You must select the
          desired value for NPOINT.  Thus, only the first job which
          initiates the IRC requires much thought about $IRC.
 
              The symmetry specified in the $DATA deck should be the
          symmetry of the reaction path.  If a saddle point happens
          to have higher symmetry, use only the lower symmetry in
          the $DATA deck when initiating the IRC.  The reaction path
          will have a lower symmetry than the saddle point whenever
          the normal mode with imaginary frequency is not totally
          symmetric.  Be careful that the order and orientation of the
          atoms corresponds to that used in the run which generated
          the hessian matrix.
 
              If you wish to follow an IRC for a different isotope,
          use the $MASS group.  If you wish to follow the IRC in
          regular Cartesian coordinates, just enter unit masses for
          each atom.  Note that CMODE and FREQ are a function of the
          atomic masses, so either regenerate FREQ and CMODE, or
          more simply, provide the correct $HESS group.
 
1

                             Gradient Extremals
                             -------- ---------
          
             This section of the manual, as well as the source code
          to trace gradient extremals was written by Frank Jensen of 
          Odense University.

             A Gradient Extremal (GE) curve consists of points where
          the gradient norm on a constant energy surface is 
          stationary.  This is equivalent to the condition that
          the gradient is an eigenvector of the Hessian.  Such GE
          curves radiate along all normal modes from a stationary
          point, and the GE leaving along the lowest normal mode
          from a minimum is the gentlest ascent curve.  This is not
          the same as the IRC curve connecting a minimum and a TS,
          but may in some cases be close.

             GEs may be divided into three groups:  those leading
          to dissociation, those leading to atoms colliding, and 
          those which connect stationary points.  The latter class
          allows a determination of many (all?) stationary points on
          a PES by tracing out all the GEs. Following GEs is thus a
          semi-systematic way of mapping out stationary points.  The
          disadvantages are:
             i) There are many (but finitely many!) GEs for a 
                large molecule.
            ii) Following GEs is computationally expensive.
           iii) There is no control over what type of 
                stationary point (if any) a GE will lead to. 

             Normally one is only interested in minima and TSs, but
          many higher order saddle points will also be found.
          Furthermore, it appears that it is necessary to follow GEs
          radiating also from TSs and second (and possibly also 
          higher) order saddle point to find all the TSs.

             A rather complete map of the extremals for the H2CO
          potential surface is available in a paper which explains
          the points just raised in greater detail:
             K.Bondensgaard, F.Jensen, 
                 J.Chem.Phys. 104, 8025-8031(1996).
          An earlier paper gives some of the properties of GEs:
             D.K.Hoffman, R.S.Nord, K.Ruedenberg,
                 Theor. Chim. Acta 69, 265-279(1986).

             There are two GE algorithms in GAMESS, one due to Sun 
          and Ruedenberg (METHOD=SR), which has been extended to
          include the capability of locating bifurcation points and
          turning points, and another due to Jorgensen, Jensen, and
          Helgaker (METHOD=JJH):
             J. Sun, K. Ruedenberg, J.Chem.Phys. 98, 9707-9714(1993)
             P. Jorgensen, H. J. Aa. Jensen, T. Helgaker
                 Theor. Chim. Acta 73, 55 (1988).

1

             The Sun and Ruedenberg method consist of a predictor
          step taken along the tangent to the GE curve, followed by
          one or more corrector steps to bring the geometry back to
          the GE.  Construction of the GE tangent and the corrector
          step requires elements of the third derivative of the
          energy, which is obtained by a numerical differentiation 
          of two Hessians.  This puts some limitations on which 
          systems the GE algorithm can be used for.  First, the
          numerical differentiation of the Hessian to produce third
          derivatives means that the Hessian should be calculated by
          analytical methods, thus only those types of wavefunctions
          where this is possible can be used.  Second, each
          predictor/corrector step requires at least two Hessians,
          but often more.  Maybe 20-50 such steps are necessary for
          tracing a GE from one stationary point to the next.  A
          systematic study of all the GE radiating from a stationary
          point increases the work by a factor of ~2*(3N-6).  One 
          should thus be prepared to invest at least hundreds, and 
          more likely thousands, of Hessian calculations.  In other
          words, small systems, small basis sets, and simple wave-
          functions. 

             The Jorgensen, Jensen, and Helgaker method consists of
          taking a step in the direction of the chosen Hessian
          eigenvector, and then a pure NR step in the perpendicular
          modes.  This requires (only) one Hessian calculation for 
          each step.  It is not suitable for following GEs where the
          GE tangent forms a large angle with the gradient, and it 
          is incapable of locating GE bifurcations.

             Although experience is limited at present, the JJH
          method does not appear to be suitable for following GEs in
          general (at least not in the current implementation).
          Experiment with it at your own risk!

             The flow of the SR algorithm is as follows:  A 
          predictor geometry is produced, either by jumping away
          from a stationary point, or from a step in the tangent
          direction from the previous point on the GE.  At the 
          predictor geometry, we need the gradient, the Hessian, and
          the third derivative in the gradient direction.  Depending
          on HSDFDB, this can be done in two ways.  If .TRUE. the
          gradient is calculated, and two Hessians are calculated at 
          SNUMH distance to each side in the gradient direction.
          The Hessian at the geometry is formed as the average of
          the two displaced Hessians.  This corresponds to a double-
          sided differentiation, and is the numerical most stable
          method for getting the partial third derivative matrix.
          If HSDFDB = .FALSE., the gradient and Hessian are 
          calculated at the current geometry, and one additional 
          Hessian is calculated at SNUMH distance in the gradient 
          direction.  This corresponds to a single-sided differen-
          tiation.  In both cases, two full Hessian calculations are 

1

          necessary, but HSDFDB = .TRUE. require one additional
          wavefunction and gradient calculation.  This is usually
          a fairly small price compared to two Hessians, and the
          numerically better double-sided differentiation has
          therefore been made the default.

             Once the gradient, Hessian, and third derivative is 
          available, the corrector step and the new GE tangent are
          constructed.  If the corrector step is below a threshold,
          a new predictor step is taken along the tangent vector. 
          If the corrector step is larger than the threshold, the
          correction step is taken, and a new micro iteration is
          performed.  DELCOR thus determines how closely the GE will
          be followed, and DPRED determine how closely the GE path 
          will be sampled.

             The construction of the GE tangent and corrector step
          involve solution of a set of linear equations, which in
          matrix notation can be written as Ax=B. The A-matrix is
          also the second derivative of the gradient norm on the
          constant energy surface.

             After each corrector step, various things are printed
          to monitor the behavior:  The projection of the gradient
          along the Hessian eigenvalues (the gradient is parallel
          to an eigenvector on the GE), the projection of the GE
          tangent along the Hessian eigenvectors, and the overlap
          of the Hessian eigenvectors with the mode being followed
          from the previous (optimzed) geometry.  The sign of these
          overlaps are not significant, they just refer to an
          arbitrary phase of the Hessian eigenvectors.

             After the micro iterations has converged, the Hessian
          eigenvector curvatures are also displayed, this is an
          indication of the coupling between the normal modes.  The
          number of negative eigenvalues in the A-matrix is denoted
          the GE index.  If it changes, one of the eigenvalues must
          have passed through zero.  Such points may either be GE 
          bifurcations (where two GEs cross) or may just be "turning
          points", normally when the GE switches from going uphill
          in energy to downhill, or vice versa.  The distinction is
          made based on the B-element corresponding to the A-matrix
          eigenvalue = 0. If the B-element = 0, it is a bifurcation,
          otherwise it is a turning point.

             If the GE index changes, a linear interpolation is
          performed between the last two points to locate the point
          where the A-matrix is singular, and the corresponding
          B-element is determined.  The linear interpolation points
          will in general be off the GE, and thus the evaluation of
          whether the B-element is 0 is not always easy.  The
          program additionally evaluates the two limiting vectors 
          which are solutions to the linear sets of equations, these 
          are also used for testing whether the singular point is a 
          bifurcation point or turning point.

1

             Very close to a GE bifurcation, the corrector step 
          become numerically unstable, but this is rarely a problem
          in practice.  It is a priori expected that GE bifurcation
          will occur only in symmetric systems, and the crossing GE
          will break the symmetry.  Equivalently, a crossing GE may
          be encountered when a symmetry element is formed, however
          such crossings are much harder to detect since the GE
          index does not change, as one of the A-matrix eigenvalues 
          merely touches zero.  The program prints an message if
          the absolute value of an A-matrix eigenvalue reaches a 
          minimum near zero, as such points may indicate the 
          passage of a bifurcation where a higher symmetry GE
          crosses.  Run a movie of the geometries to see if a more 
          symmetric structure is passed during the run.

             An estimate of the possible crossing GE direction is
          made at all points where the A-matrix is singular, and two
          perturbed geometries in the + and - direction are written 
          out.  These may be used as predictor geometries for 
          following a crossing GE.  If the singular geometry is a
          turning point, the + and - geometries are just predictor 
          geometries on the GE being followed. 

             In any case, a new predictor step can be taken to trace
          a different GE from the newly discovered singular point,
          using the direction determined by interpolation from the 
          two end point tangents (the GE tangent cannot be uniquely
          determined at a bifurcation point).  It is not possible to
          determine what the sign of IFOLOW should be when starting 
          off along a crossing GE at a bifurcation, one will have to 
          try a step to see if it returns to the bifurcation point 
          or not.

             In order to determine whether the GE index change it
          is necessary to keep track of the order of the A-matrix
          eigenvalues.  The overlap between successive eigenvectors
          are shown as "Alpha mode overlaps".

          Things to watch out for:

          1) The numerical differentiation to get third derivatives
          requires more accuracy than usual.  The SCF convergence 
          should be at least 100 times smaller than SNUMH, and
          preferably better.  With the default SNUMH of 10**(-4)
          the SCF convergence should be at least 10**(-6).  Since
          the last few SCF cycles are inexpensive, it is a good idea
          to tighten the SCF convergence as much as possible, to
          maybe 10**(-8) or better.  You may also want to increase 
          the integral accuracy by reducing the cutoffs (ITOL and 
          ICUT) and possibly also try more accurate integrals 
          (INTTYP=HONDO).  The CUTOFF in $TRNSFM may also be reduced 
          to produce more accurate Hessians.  Don't attempt to use a
          value for SNUMH below 10**(-6), as you simply can't get 
          enough accuracy.  Since experience is limited at present,
          it is recommended that some tests runs are made to learn
          the sensitivity of these factors for your system. 

1

          2) GEs can be followed in both directions, uphill or
          downhill. When stating from a stationary point, the
          direction is implicitly given as away from the stationary
          point.  When starting from a non-stationary point, the "+"
          and "-" directions (as chosen by the sign of IFOLOW) 
          refers to the gradient direction.  The "+" direction is
          along the gradient (energy increases) and "-" is opposite
          to the gradient (energy decreases). 

          3) A switch from one GE to another may be seen when two
          GE come close together.  This is especially troublesome 
          near bifurcation points where two GEs actually cross.  In
          such cases a switch to a GE with -higher- symmetry may
          occur without any indication that this has happened, 
          except possibly that a very large GE curvature suddenly 
          shows up.  Avoid running the calculation with less 
          symmetry than the system actually has, as this increases
          the likelihood that such switches occuring.  Fix: alter
          DPRED to avoid having the predictor step close to the 
          crossing GE.

          4) "Off track" error message:  The Hessian eigenvector
          which is parallel to the gradient is not the same as
          the one with the largest overlap to the previous
          Hessian mode.  This usually indicate that a GE switch
          has occured (note that a switch may occur without this
          error message), or a wrong value for IFOLOW when starting
          from a non-stationary point. Fix: check IFOLOW, if it is 
          correct then reduce DPRED, and possibly also DELCOR.

          5) Low overlaps of A-matrix eigenvectors.  Small overlaps
          may give wrong assignment, and wrong conclusions about GE
          index change. Fix: reduce DPRED.

          6) The interpolation for locating a point where one of the
          A-matrix eigenvalues is zero fail to converge.  Fix: 
          reduce DPRED (and possibly also DELCOR) to get a shorther 
          (and better) interpolation line. 

          7) The GE index changes by more than 1.  A GE switch may
          have occured, or more than one GE index change is located 
          between the last and current point.  Fix: reduce DPRED to 
          sample the GE path more closely.

          8) If SNRMAX is too large the algorithm may try to locate
          stationary points which are not actually on the GE being 
          followed.  Since GEs often pass quite near a stationary 
          point, SNRMAX should only be increased above the default 
          0.10 after some consideration.

1

                        Continuum solvation methods
          
             In a very thorough 1994 review of continuum solvation
          models, Tomasi and Persico divide the possible approaches
          to the treatment of solvent effects into four categories:
                a) virial equations of state, correlation functions
                b) Monte Carlo or molecular dynamics simulations
                c) continuum treatments
                d) molecular treatments
          The Effective Fragment Potential method, documented in the
          following section of this chapter, falls into the latter
          category, as each EFP solvent molecule is modeled as a
          distinct object.  This section describes the three continuum
          models which are implemented in the standard version of
          GAMESS, and a fourth model which can be interfaced.
          
             Continuum models typically form a cavity of some sort
          containing the solute molecule, while the solvent outside
          the cavity is thought of as a continuous medium and is
          categorized by a limited amount of physical data, such as
          the dielectric constant.  The electric field of the
          charged particles comprising the solute interact with this
          background medium, producing a polarization in it, which
          in turn feeds back upon the solute's wavefunction.
          
                                     * * * 
          
             A simple continuum model is the Onsager cavity model,
          often called the Self-Consistent Reaction Field, or SCRF 
          model.  This represents the charge distribution of the
          solute in terms of a multipole expansion.  SCRF usually
          uses an idealized cavity (spherical or ellipsoidal) to
          allow an analytic solution to the interaction energy 
          between the solute multipole and the multipole which this
          induces in the continuum.  This method is implemented in
          GAMESS in the simplest possible fashion:
                 i) a spherical cavity is used
                ii) the molecular electrostatic potential of the
                    solute is represented as a dipole only, except
                    a monopole is also included for an ionic solute.
          The input for this implementation of the Kirkwood-Onsager
          model is provided in $SCRF.
          
             Some references on the SCRF method are
               1. J.G.Kirkwood  J.Chem.Phys. 2, 351 (1934)
               2. L.Onsager  J.Am.Chem.Soc. 58, 1486 (1936)
               3. O.Tapia, O.Goscinski  Mol.Phys. 29, 1653 (1975)
               4. M.M.Karelson, A.R.Katritzky, M.C.Zerner
                    Int.J.Quantum Chem.,  Symp. 20, 521-527 (1986)
               5. K.V.Mikkelsen, H.Agren, H.J.Aa.Jensen, T.Helgaker
                    J.Chem.Phys. 89, 3086-3095 (1988)
               6. M.W.Wong, M.J.Frisch, K.B.Wiberg
                    J.Am.Chem.Soc. 113, 4776-4782 (1991)
               7. M.Szafran, M.M.Karelson, A.R.Katritzky, J.Koput,
                     M.C.Zerner  J.Comput.Chem. 14, 371-377 (1993)
               8. M.Karelson, T.Tamm, M.C.Zerner
                    J.Phys.Chem. 97, 11901-11907 (1993)

1

          The method is very sensitive to the choice of the solute
          RADIUS, but not very sensitive to the particular DIELEC of
          polar solvents.  The plots in reference 7 illustrate these
          points very nicely.  The SCRF implementation in GAMESS is
          Zerner's Method A, described in the same reference.  The
          total solute energy includes the Born term, if the solute
          is an ion.  Another limitation is that a solute's electro-
          static potential is not likely to be fit well as a dipole
          moment only, for example see Table VI of reference 5
          which illustrates the importance of higher multipoles.
          Finally, the restriction to a spherical cavity may not be
          very representative of the solute's true shape.  However,
          in the special case of a roundish molecule, and a large
          dipole which is geometry sensitive, the SCRF model may 
          include sufficient physics to be meaningful:
               M.W.Schmidt, T.L.Windus, M.S.Gordon
               J.Am.Chem.Soc.  117, 7480-7486(1995).
          
                                     * * * 

             A much more sophisticated continuum method, named the
          Polarizable Continuum Model, is also available.  The PCM
          method places a solute in a cavity formed by a union of
          spheres centered on each atom.  PCM also includes a more
          exact treatment of the electrostatic interaction with the
          surrounding medium, as the electrostatic potential of the
          solute generates an 'apparent surface charge' on the
          cavity's surface.  The computational procedure divides
          this surface into small tesserae, on which the charge (and
          contributions to the gradient) are evaluated.  Typically
          the spheres defining the cavity are taken to be 1.2 times
          the van der Waals radii.  A technical difficulty caused by
          the penetration of the solute charge density outside this
          cavity is dealt with by a renormalization.  The solvent is
          characterized by its dielectric constant, surface tension,
          size, density, and so on.  Procedures are provided not
          only for the computation of the electrostatic interaction
          of the solute with the apparent surface charges, but also
          for the cavitation energy, and dispersion and repulsion
          contributions to the solvation free energy.  

             The main input group is $PCM, with $PCMCAV providing
          auxiliary cavity information.  If any of the optional
          energy computations are requested in $PCM, the additional
          input groups $IEFPCM, $NEWCAV, $DISBS, or $DISREP may be
          required.
          
             Solvation of course affects the non-linear optical
          properties of molecules.  The PCM implementation extends
          RUNTYP=TDHF to include solvent effects.  Both static and
          frequency dependent hyperpolarizabilities can be found.
          Besides the standard PCM electrostatic contribution, the
          IREP and IDP keywords can be used to determine the effects
          of repulsion and dispersion on the polarizabilities.

1

             Due to its sophistication, users of the PCM model are
          strongly encouraged to read the primary literature.  The 
          first references use the boundary element method for solving
          the apparent surface charge problem.  Recently the integral
          equation formalism has been developed as a more numerically
          suitable method.
          
              General papers on the PCM method:
           1) S.Miertus, E.Scrocco, J.Tomasi
                  Chem.Phys.  55, 117-129(1981)
           2) J.Tomasi, M.Persico  Chem.Rev.  94, 2027-2094(1994)
           3) R.Cammi, J.Tomasi  J.Comput.Chem.  16, 1449-1458(1995)
          
              The GEPOL method for cavity construction:
           4) J.L.Pascual-Ahuir, E.Silla, J.Tomasi, R.Bonaccorsi
                  J.Comput.Chem.  8, 778-787(1987)
          
              Charge renormalization (see also ref. 3):
           5) B.Mennucci, J.Tomasi J.Chem.Phys. 106, 5151-5158(1997)
          
              Derivatives with respect to nuclear coordinates:
              (energy gradient and hessian)
           6) R.Cammi, J.Tomasi  J.Chem.Phys.  100, 7495-7502(1994)
           7) R.Cammi, J.Tomasi  J.Chem.Phys.  101, 3888-3897(1995)
           8) M.Cossi, B.Mennucci, R.Cammi
                  J.Comput.Chem.  17, 57-73(1996)
          
              Derivatives with respect to applied electric fields:
              (polarizabilities and hyperpolarizabilities)
           9) R.Cammi, J.Tomasi
                  Int.J.Quantum Chem.  Symp. 29, 465-474(1995)
          10) R.Cammi, M.Cossi, J.Tomasi
                  J.Chem.Phys.  104, 4611-4620(1996)
          11) R.Cammi, M.Cossi, B.Mennucci, J.Tomasi
                  J.Chem.Phys.  105, 10556-10564(1996)
          12) B. Mennucci, C. Amovilli, J. Tomasi
                  J.Chem.Phys.  submitted.
          
              Cavitation energy:
          13) R.A.Pierotti  Chem.Rev.  76, 717-726(1976)
          14) J.Langlet, P.Claverie, J.Caillet, A.Pullman
                  J.Phys.Chem.  92, 1617-1631(1988)
          
              Dispersion and repulsion energies:
          15) F.Floris, J.Tomasi  J.Comput.Chem.  10, 616-627(1989)
          16) C.Amovilli, B.Mennucci
                  J.Phys.Chem.B  101, 1051-1057(1997)

1

              Integral Equation Formalism papers.  The first of these
          deals with anisotropies, the last 2 with nuclear gradients.
          17) E.Cances, B.Mennucci, J.Tomasi
                  J.Chem.Phys.  107, 3032-3041(1997)
          18) B.Mennucci, E.Cances, J.Tomasi
                  J.Phys.Chem.B  101, 10506-17(1997)
          19) B.Mennucci, R.Cammi, J.Tomasi
                  J.Chem.Phys.  109, 2798-2807(1998)
          20) J.Tomasi, B.Mennucci, E.Cances
                  J.Mol.Struct.(THEOCHEM) 464, 211-226(1999)
          21) E.Cances, B.Mennucci  J.Chem.Phys. 109, 249-259(1998)
          22) E.Cances, B.Mennucci, J.Tomasi
                  J.Chem.Phys. 109, 260-266(1998)

             At the present time, the PCM model in GAMESS has the
          following limitations:

               a) SCFTYP=RHF and MCSCF, only.
               b) point group symmetry is switched off internally
                  during PCM.
               c) The PCM model runs in parallel only for IEF=3 and
                  SCFTYP=RHF, but not for TDHF jobs.
               d) electric field integrals at normals to the surface
                  elements are stored on disk, even during DIRSCF
                  runs.  The file size may be considerable.
               e) To minimize common block storage, the maximum
                  number of spheres forming the cavity is 100, with
                  an upper limit on the number of surface tesserae
                  set to 2500.  These may be raised by the 'mung'
                  script listed in the Programming chapter.
               f) nuclear derivatives are limited to gradients,
                  although theory for hessians is given in Ref. 7.
          
             The calculation shown on the next page illustrates the
          use of most PCM options.  Since methane is non-polar, its
          internal energy change and the direct PCM electrostatic
          interaction is smaller than the cavitation, repulsion, and
          dispersion corrections.  Note that the use of ICAV, IREP,
          and IDP are currently incompatible with gradients, so a
          reasonable calculation sequence might be to perform the
          geometry optimization with PCM electrostatics turned on,
          then perform an additional calculation to include the other
          solvent effects, adding extra functions to improve the
          dispersion correction.

1

          !  calculation of CH4 (metano) in PCM water.
          !  This input reproduces the data in Table 2, line 6, of
          !  C.Amovilli, B.Mennucci J.Phys.Chem. B101, 1051-7(1997)
          !
          !  The gas phase FINAL energy is  -40.2075980280
          !  The FINAL energy in PCM water= -40.2143590161
          !                                                   (lit.)
          !  FREE ENERGY IN SOLVENT      = -25234.89 KCAL/MOL
          !  INTERNAL ENERGY IN SOLVENT  = -25230.64 KCAL/MOL
          !  DELTA INTERNAL ENERGY       =       .01 KCAL/MOL ( 0.0)
          !  ELECTROSTATIC INTERACTION   =      -.22 KCAL/MOL (-0.2)
          !  PIEROTTI CAVITATION ENERGY  =      5.98 KCAL/MOL ( 6.0)
          !  DISPERSION FREE ENERGY      =     -6.00 KCAL/MOL (-6.0)
          !  REPULSION FREE ENERGY       =      1.98 KCAL/MOL ( 2.0)
          !  TOTAL INTERACTION           =      1.73 KCAL/MOL ( 1.8)
          !  TOTAL FREE ENERGY IN SOLVENT= -25228.91 KCAL/MOL
          !
           $contrl scftyp=rhf runtyp=energy $end
           $guess  guess=huckel $end
           $system memory=300000 $end
          !    the W1 basis input here exactly matches HONDO's DZP
           $DATA
          CH4...gas phase geometry...in PCM water
          Td
          
          Carbon      6.
             DZV
             D 1 ; 1 0.75 1.0
          
          Hydrogen    1.  0.6258579976  0.6258579976  0.6258579976
             DZV 0 1.20 1.15  ! inner and outer scale factors
             P 1 ; 1 1.00 1.0
          
           $END
          !    reference cited used value for H2O's solvent radius
          !    which differs from the built in constants.
           $PCM    IEF=0 ICOMP=2 IREP=1 IDP=1 ICAV=1
                   SOLVNT=WATER RSOLV=1.35 $END
           $NEWCAV IPTYPE=2 ITSNUM=540 $END
          !    dispersion W2 basis uses exponents which are
          !    1/3 of smallest exponent in W1 basis of $DATA.
           $DISBS  NADD=11 NKTYP(1)=0,1,2, 0,1, 0,1, 0,1, 0,1
                   XYZE(1)=0.0,0.0,0.0, 0.0511
                           0.0,0.0,0.0, 0.0382
                           0.0,0.0,0.0, 0.25
                   1.1817023, 1.1817023, 1.1817023,  0.05435467
                   1.1817023, 1.1817023, 1.1817023,  0.33333333
                  -1.1817023, 1.1817023,-1.1817023,  0.05435467
                  -1.1817023, 1.1817023,-1.1817023,  0.33333333
                   1.1817023,-1.1817023,-1.1817023,  0.05435467
                   1.1817023,-1.1817023,-1.1817023,  0.33333333
                  -1.1817023,-1.1817023, 1.1817023,  0.05435467
                  -1.1817023,-1.1817023, 1.1817023,  0.33333333 $end

1
    
              COSMO (conductor-like screening model) represents a
          different approach for carrying out polarized continuum 
          calculations.  The model was originally developed by
          Andreas Klamt, with extensions to ab initio computation
          in GAMESS by Kim Baldridge.
          
              In the COSMO method, the surrounding medium is modeled
          as a conductor rather than as a dielectric in order to 
          establish the initial boundary conditions.  The assumption
          that the surrounding medium is well modelled as a conductor 
          simplifies the electrostatic computations and corrections 
          may be made a posteriori for dielectric behavior.  
          
              The current implementation of COSMO involves the
          computation of distributed multipoles up to hexadecapoles 
          to represent the charge distribution of the molecule
          within the cavity.  The multipole moments induce the
          formation of charges on the surface of the cavity that 
          contains the molecule.  These charges are then fed back 
          into the SCF, and both the molecular wavefunction and
          the surface charges are iterated to self-consistency.  
          
              The original model of Klamt was introduced using a
          molecular shaped cavity which had open parts along the
          crevices of intersecting atomic spheres.  While having
          considerable technical advantages, this approximation
          causes artifacts in the context of the more generalized
          theory, so the current method for cavity construction 
          includes a closure of the cavity to eliminate crevices or
          pockets. 
          
              At present, the COSMO model accounts only for the
          electrostatic interactions between solvent and solute.
          Klamt has proposed a novel statistical scheme to compute 
          the full solvation free energy for neutral solutes, which 
          will be formulated for GAMESS by Baldridge et al.  
          
              The simplicity of the COSMO model allows computation of
          gradients, allowing optimization within the context of the
          solvent.  The method is programmed for closed shell RHF 
          energy and gradient, and the MP2 energy correction may be
          obtained.  
          
              Some references on the COSMO model are:
                    A.Klamt, G.Schuurman  
                       J.Chem.Soc.Perkin Trans 2, 799-805(1993)
                    A.Klamt  J.Phys.Chem.  99, 2224-2235(1995)
                    K.Baldridge, A.Klamt
                       J.Chem.Phys.  106, 6622-6633 (1997)

1
    
             A final possible continuum treatment is the "solution
          model 5" approach.  Ab initio SM5 is described in
             J.Li, G.D.Hawkins, C.J.Cramer, D.G.Truhlar
             Chem.Phys.Lett.  288, 293-298(1998)
          SM5 represents the molecule's electrostatics as a set of
          atomic point charges.  These are chosen by a procedure
          based on correcting Lowdin atomic charges according to a
          quadratic function of the computed Mayer bond orders, 
          which is designed to better reproduce experimental dipole
          moments.  These charges are called "charge model 2", and
          CM2 is described in
             J.Li, T.Zhu, C.J.Cramer, D.G.Truhlar
             J.Phys.Chem.A  102, 1820-1831(1998)
          In addition to a self-consistent reaction field treatment
          of the CM2 electrostatics, SM5 includes a term accounting
          for the following first solvation shell effects:  cavity
          creation, dispersion, and changes in solvent structure,
          which are modeled by atomic surface tension parameters.
          It is possible to use this code simply to extract gas phase
          CM2 charges.  The implementation is termed GAMESOL (one S),
          by
             J.Li, G.D.Hawkins, D.A.Liotard, C.J.Cramer, D.G.Truhlar
          and is available at 
             http://comp.chem.umn.edu/gamesol
          After signing a license not much more stringent than the
          license for GAMESS itself, you can obtain the new source
          code from U. Minnesota.  The interface is not clean, as 
          considerable code is inserted directly into RHFUHF and 
          other GAMESS modules, so you must be very careful to obtain
          code that matches the dates on the top of your original
          GAMESS source files.

1
          
                  The Effective Fragment Potential Method
          
             The basic idea behind the effective fragment potential
          (EFP) method is to replace the chemically inert part of a
          system by EFPs, while performing a regular ab initio 
          calculation on the chemically active part.  Here "inert" 
          means that no covalent bond breaking process occurs.  This 
          "spectator region" consists of one or more "fragments", 
          which interact with the ab initio "active region" through 
          non-bonded interactions, and so of course these EFP 
          interactions affect the ab initio wavefunction.  A simple 
          example of an active region might be a solute molecule,  
          with a surrounding spectator region of solvent molecules 
          represented by fragments.  Each discrete solvent molecule 
          is represented by a single fragment potential, in marked 
          contrast to continuum models for solvation.
          
             The quantum mechanical part of the system is entered in
          the $DATA group, along with an appropriate basis.  The 
          EFPs defining the fragments are input by means of a $EFRAG 
          group and one or more $FRAGNAME groups describing each 
          fragment's EFP.  These groups define non-bonded interactions
          between the ab initio system and the fragments, and between
          the fragments.  The former interactions enter via one-
          electron operators in the ab initio Hamiltonian, while the
          latter interactions are treated by analytic functions.  The
          only electrons explicitly treated (with basis functions
          used to expand occupied orbitals) are those in the active
          region, so there are no new two electron terms.  Thus the
          use of EFPs leads to significant time savings compared to
          full ab initio calculations on the same system. 
  
             There are two types of EFP available in GAMESS, EFP1 and
          EFP2.  EFP1, the original method, employs a fitted repulsive
          potential.  EFP1 is primarily used to model RHF/DZP water
          molecules to study aqueous solvation effects, see references
          1-3.  Co-workers at NIST have also used EFP1 to model parts
          of enzymes, see reference 4.  EFP2 is a more general method
          that is applicable to any species, including water, and its
          repulsive potential is obtained from first principles.  EFP2
          forms the basis of the covalent EFP method described below.
          

                          *** Terms in an EFP ***
          
             The non-bonded interactions currently implemented are:
          
          1) Coulomb interaction.  The charge distribution of the 
          fragments is represented by an arbitrary number of charges,
          dipoles, quadrupoles, and octopoles, which interact with 
          the ab initio hamiltonian as well as with multipoles on 
          other fragments.  It is possible to input a screening term 
          that accounts for the charge penetration.  This screening
          term is automatically included for EFP1.  Typically the
          multipole expansion points are located on atomic nuclei 
          and at bond midpoints.

1


          2) Dipole polarizability.  An arbitrary number of dipole
          polarizability tensors can be used to calculate the 
          induced dipole on a fragment due to the electric field of
          the ab initio system as well as all the other fragments.
          These induced dipoles interact with the ab initio system 
          as well as the other EFPs, in turn changing their electric 
          fields.  All induced dipoles are therefore iterated to 
          self-consistency.  Typically the polarizability tensors 
          are located at the centroid of charge of each localized 
          orbital of a fragment.
          
          3) Repulsive potential.  Two different forms are used in
          EFP1: one for ab initio-EFP repulsion and one for EFP-EFP
          repulsion.  The form of the potentials is empirical, and
          consists of distributed Gaussian or exponential functions,
          respectively.  The primary contribution to the repulsion is
          the quantum mechanical exchange repulsion, but the fitting
          technique used to develop this term also includes the
          effects of charge transfer.  Typically these fitted
          potentials are located on atomic nuclei within the fragment.
          The repulsive potential for EFP2 was derived based on an
          overlap expansion using localized molecular orbitals, as
          described in references 4-6.  The EFP2 repulsive potential
          has no fitted parameters, and it can be automatically
          generated during a RUNTYP=MAKEFP job, as described below.
          

                  *** Constructing an EFP1 using GAMESS ***
          
             RUNTYP=MOROKUMA assists in the decomposition of inter-
          molecular interaction energies into electrostatic, 
          polarization, charge transfer, and exchange repulsion 
          contributions.  This is very useful in developing EFPs 
          since potential problems can be attributed to a particular
          term by comparison to these energy components for a 
          particular system.
          
             A molecular multipole expansion can be obtained using 
          $ELMOM.  A distributed multipole expansion can be obtained 
          by either a Mulliken-like partitioning of the density 
          (using $STONE) or by using localized molecular orbitals 
          ($LOCAL: DIPDCM and QADDCM).  The molecular dipole 
          polarizability tensor can be obtained during a Hessian run 
          ($CPHF), and a distributed LMO polarizability expression 
          is also available ($LOCAL: POLDCM).  
          
             In EFP1, the repulsive potential is derived by fitting
          the difference between ab initio computed intermolecular 
          interaction energies, and the form used for Coulomb and 
          polarizability interactions.  This difference is obtained 
          at a large number of different interaction geometries, and
          is then fitted.  Thus, the repulsive term is implicitly a 
          function of the choices made in representing the Coulomb 
          and polarizability terms.  Note that GAMESS currently does
          not provide a way to obtain these EFP1 repulsive potential,
          or the charge penetration screening parameters.

1

          
             Since for EFP1 a user cannot generate all terms necessary
          to define a new $FRAGNAME group using GAMESS, in practice
          the usage of EFP1 is limited to using the internally stored
          H2OEF2 potential mentioned below.
          

                  *** Constructing an EFP2 using GAMESS ***
          
             As noted above, the repulsive potential for EFP2 is
          derived from a localized orbital overlap expansion.  It is
          generally recommended that one use at least a double zeta
          plus diffuse plus polarization basis set, e.g. 6-31++G(d,p)
          to generate the EFP2 repulsive potential.  However, it has
          been observed that 6-31G(d) works reasonably well due to a
          fortuitous cancellation of errors.  The EFP2 potential for
          any moleulce can be generated as follows:

          (a) Choose a basis set and geometry for the molecule of
          interest.  The geometry is ordinarily optimized at the
          Hartree-Fock level of theory with the chosen basis set, but
          this is not a requirement.  It is good to recall, however,
          that EFP internal geometries are fixed, so it is important
          to give some thought to the chosen geometry.

          (b) Perform a RUNTYP=MAKEFP run for the chosen molecule
          using the chosen geometry in $DATA and the chosen basis set
          in $BASIS.  This will generate the entire EFP2 potential
          in the run's .dat file.  The only user-defined variable
          that must be filled in is the FRAGNAME.

          (c) Transfer the entire fragment potential for the molecule
          to any input file in which this fragment is to be used.
          Since the internal geometry of an EFP is fixed, one need
          only specify the first three atoms of any fragment in order
          to position them in $EFRAG.  The coordinates of any other
          atoms are automatically fixed by the program.


                           *** Current Limitations ***
          
          1. For EFP1, the energy and energy gradient are programmed,
          which permits RUNTYP=ENERGY, GRADIENT, and numerical HESSIAN.
          The necessary programing to use the EFP gradients to move
          on the potential surface are programmed for RUNTYP=OPTIMIZE,
          SADPOINT, and IRC (see reference 3), but the other gradient
          based potential surface explorations such as DRC are not
          yet available.  Finally, RUNTYP=PROP is also permissible.
          For EFP2, the gradient terms for ab initio-EFP interactions
          have not yet been coded, so geometry optimizations are only
          sensible for a COORD=FRAGONLY run; that is, a run in which 
          only fragments are present.
          
          2. The ab initio system must be treated with RHF, ROHF, 
          UHF, the open shell SCF wavefunctions permitted by the GVB
          code, or MCSCF.  The correlated methods such as MP2 and CI
          should not be used, since the available H2OEF2 potential

1

          was derived at the RHF level, and therefore does not
          contain dispersion terms.  A correlated computation on
          the ab initio system without these terms in the EFP will
          probably lead to unphysical results.
          
          3. EFPs can move relative to the ab initio system and 
          relative to each other, but the internal structure of an 
          EFP is frozen.
          
          4. The boundary between the ab initio system and EFP1's 
          must not be placed across a chemical bond.  However, see
          the discussion below regarding covalent bonds.
          
          5. Calculations must be done in C1 symmetry at present.
          Enter NOSYM=1 in $CONTRL to accomplish this.
 
          6. Reorientation of the fragments and ab initio system
          is not well coordinated.  If you are giving Cartesian 
          coordinates for the fragments (COORD=CART in $EFRAG),
          be sure to use $CONTRL's COORD=UNIQUE option so that the 
          ab initio molecule is not reoriented.
          
          7. If you need IR intensities, you have to use NVIB=2.  
          The potential surface is usually very soft for EFP 
          motions, and double differenced Hessians should usually 
          be obtained.

          8. For EFP2, the charge penetration (screening) term is
          not currently implemented for automatic generation by
          RUNTYP=MAKEFP, so generation of an EFP2 as described above
          will not include screening.  This is considered to be a
          minor omission that will be corrected in a future release.
          

                         *** Global optimization ***
          
              If there are a large number of effective fragments, it
          is difficult to locate the lowest energy structures by hand.  
          Typically these are numerous, and one would like to have a
          number of them, not just the very lowest energy.  The RUNTYP
          of GLOBOP contains a Monte Carlo procedure to generate a
          random set of starting structures to look for those with
          the lowest energy at a single temperature.  If desired, a 
          simulated annealing protocol to cool the temperature may 
          be used.  These two procedures may be combined with a local
          minimum search, at some or all of the randomly generated
          structures.  The local minimum search is controlled by the
          usual geometry optimizer, namely $STATPT input, and thus
          permits the optimization of any ab initio atoms.
          
              The Monte Carlo procedure by default uses the Metropolis
          algorithm to move just one of the effective fragments.  If
          desired, the method of Parks to move all fragments at once
          may be tried, by changing ALPHA from zero and setting 
          BOLTWT=AVESTEP instead of STANDARD.  
          
1

              The present program was used to optimize the structure
          of water clusters.  Let us consider the case of the twelve
          water cluster, for which the following ten structures were
          published by Day, Pachter, Gordon, and Merrill:
             1. (D2d)2     -0.170209     6. (D2d)(C2)  -0.167796
             2. (D2d)(S4)  -0.169933     7. S6         -0.167761
             3. (S4)2      -0.169724     8. cage b     -0.167307
             4. D3         -0.168289     9. cage a     -0.167284
             5. (C1c)(Cs)  -0.167930    10. (C1c)(C1c) -0.167261
          A test input using Metropolis style Monte Carlo to examine
          300 geometries at each temperature value, using simulated
          annealing cooling from 200 to 50 degrees, and with local
          minimization every 10 structures was run ten times.  Each
          run sampled about 7000 geometries.  One simulation found
          structure 2, while two of the runs found structure 3.  The
          other seven runs located structures with energy values in 
          the range -0.163 to -0.164.  In all cases the runs began
          with the same initial geometry, but produced different
          results due to the random number generation used in the
          Monte Carlo.  Clearly one must try a lot of simulations to
          be confident about having found most of the low energy
          structures.  
          
              If there is an ab initio portion present in your 
          system, it is probably impractical to carry out a simulated
          annealing protocol.  However, a single temperature Monte
          Carlo calculation may be feasible.  In particular, you may
          wish to avoid the local minimization steps, and instead
          manually examine the structures from the Monte Carlo steps
          in order to choose a few for full geometry optimization.
          Note that SMODIF input can allow the ab initio part of the
          system to participate in the Monte Carlo jumps.  However,
          this should be done with caution.

          Monte Carlo references:
            N.Metropolis, A.Rosenbluth, A.Teller
                J.Chem.Phys. 21, 1087(1953).
            G.T.Parks  Nucl.Technol. 89, 233(1990).
          Monte Carlo with local minimization:
            Z.Li, H.A.Scheraga
                Proc.Nat.Acad.Sci. USA  84, 6611(1987).
          Simulated annealing reference:
            S.Kirkpatrick, C.D.Gelatt, M.P.Vecci
                Science 220, 671(1983).
          
          The present program is described in the paper by Paul Day,
          Ruth Pachter, Mark Gordon, and Grant Merrill listed in the
          EFP references at the end of this section.  It resembles
          the work of
             D.J.Wales, M.P.Hodges Chem.Phys.Lett. 286, 65-72 (1998).
          
1
          
                      *** Practical hints for using EFPs ***
          
             At the present time, we have only one EFP suitable for
          general use.  This EFP models water, and its numerical 
          parameters are internally stored, using the fragment name
          H2OEF2.  These numerical parameters are improved values 
          over the H2OEF1 set which were presented and used in 
          reference 2, and they also include the improved EFP-EFP 
          repulsive term defined in reference 3.  The H2OEF2 water
          EFP was derived from RHF/DH(d,p) computations on the water 
          dimer system.  When you use it, therefore, the ab initio 
          part of your system should be treated at the SCF level, 
          using a basis set of the same quality (ideally DH(d,p), 
          but probably other DZP sets such as 6-31G(d,p) will give 
          good results as well).  Use of better basis sets than DZP 
          with this water EFP has not been tested.

             As noted, effective fragments have frozen internal 
          geometries, and therefore only translate and rotate with 
          respect to the ab initio region.  An EFP's frozen 
          coordinates are positioned to the desired location(s) in
          $EFRAG as follows:
            a) the corresponding points are found in $FRAGNAME.  
            b) Point -1- in $EFRAG and its FRAGNAME equivalent are 
               made to coincide.
            c) The vector connecting -1- and -2- is aligned with
               the corresponding vector connecting FRAGNAME points.  
            d) The plane defined by -1-, -2-, and -3- is made to
               coincide with the corresponding FRAGNAME plane.  
          Therefore the 3 points in $EFRAG define only the relative
          position of the EFP, and not its internal structure.
          So, if the "internal structure" given by points in $EFRAG
          differs from the true values in $FRAGNAME, then the order
          in which the points are given in $EFRAG can affect the 
          positioning of the fragment.  It may be easier to input 
          water EFPs if you use the Z-matrix style to define them,
          because then you can ensure you use the actual frozen
          geometry in your $EFRAG.  Note that the H2OEF2 EFP uses 
          the frozen geometry r(OH)=0.9438636, a(HOH)=106.70327, 
          and the names of its 3 fragment points are ZO1, ZH2, ZH3.
          
             The translations and rotations of EFPs with respect to
          the ab initio system and one another are automatically 
          quite soft degrees of freedom.  After all, the EFP model 
          is meant to handle weak interactions!  Therefore the 
          satisfactory location of structures on these flat surfaces 
          will require use of a tight convergence on the gradient: 
          OPTTOL=0.00001 in the $STATPT group.

             The effect of a bulk continuum surrounding the solute
          plus EFP waters can be obtained by using the PCM model.
          To do this, simply add a $PCM group to your input, in
          addition to the $EFRAG.  The simultaneous use of EFP and
          PCM is presently limited to energy calculations, so any
          geometry optimization must be done with only $EFRAG input.
          
1

                   *** QM/MM across covalent bonds ***

              Recent work by Visvaldas Kairys and Jan Jensen has made
          it possible to extend the EFP methodology beyond the simple
          solute/solvent case described above.  When there is a
          covalent bond between the portion of the system to be
          modeled by quantum mechanics, and the portion which is to 
          be treated by EFP multipole and polarizability terms, an
          additional layer is needed in the model.  The covalent
          linkage is not so simple as the interactions between
          closed shell solute and solvent molecules.  The "buffer
          zone" between the quantum mechanics and the EFP consists of
          frozen nuclei, and frozen localized orbitals, so that the
          quantum mechanical region sees a orbital representation
          of the closest particles, and multipoles etc. beyond that.
          Since the orbitals in the buffer zone are frozen, it need
          extend only over a few atoms in order to keep the orbitals
          in the fully optimized quantum region within that region.

              The general outline of this kind of computation is
          as follows:
              a) a full quantum mechanics computation on a system
                 containing the quantum region, the buffer region,
                 and a few atoms into the EFP region, to obtain the
                 frozen localized orbitals in the buffer zone.
                 This is called the "truncation run".
              b) a full quantum mechanics computation on a system
                 with all quantum region atoms removed, and with
                 the frozen localized orbitals in the buffer zone.
                 The necessary multipole and polarizability data
                 to construct the EFP that will describes the EFP
                 region will be extracted from the wavefunction.
                 This is called the "MAKEFP run".  It is possible
                 to use several such runs if the total EFP region
                 is quite large.
              c) The intended QM/MM run(s), after combining the
                 information from these first two types of runs.

              As an example, consider a protonated lysine residue
          which one might want to consider quantum mechanically
          in a protein whose larger parts are to be treated with
          an EFP.  The protonated lysine is

                                           NH2
            +                             /
             H3N(CH2)(CH2)(CH2)--(CH2)(CH)
                                          \
                                           COOH

          The bonds which you see drawn show how the molecule is
          partitioned between the quantum mechanical side chain,
          a CH2CH group in the buffer zone, and eventually two
          different EFPs may be substituted in the area of the 
          NH2 and COOH groups to form the protein backbone.

1
          
             The "truncation run" will be on the entire system
          as you see it, with the 13 atoms in the side chain
          first in $DATA, the 5 atoms in the buffer zone next in
          $DATA, and the simplified EFP region at the end.  This
          run will compute the full quantum wavefunction by
          RUNTYP=ENERGY, followed by the calculation of localized
          orbitals, followed by truncation of the localized 
          orbitals that are found in the buffer zone so that they
          contain no contribution from AOs outside the buffer zone.
          The key input groups for this run are
           $contrl 
           $truncn doproj=.true. plain=.true. natab=13 natbf=5 $end
          This will generate a total of 6 localized molecular
          orbitals in the buffer zone (one CC, three CH, two 1s
          inner shells), expanded in terms of atomic orbitals
          located only on those atoms.

              The truncation run prepares template input files for
          the next run, including adjustments of nuclear charges
          at boundaries, etc.

              The "MAKEFP" run drops all 13 atoms in the quantum
          region, and uses the frozen orbitals just prepared to
          obtain a wavefunction for the EFP region.  The carbon
          atom in the buffer zone that is connected to the now
          absent QM region will have its nuclear charge changed
          from 6 to 5 to account for a missing electron.  The key 
          input for this RUNTYP=MAKEFP job is the six orbitals in
          $VEC, plus the groups
           $guess guess=huckel insorb=6 $end
           $mofrz frz=.true. ifrz(1)=1,2,3,4,5,6 $end
           $stone
          QMMMbuf
           $end

          which will cause the wavefunction optimization for the
          remaining atoms to optimize orbitals only in the NH2
          and COOH pieces.  After this wavefunction is found, the
          run extracts the EFP information needed for the QM/MM
          third run(s).  This means running the Stone analysis for
          distributed multipoles, and obtaining a polarizability 
          tensor for each localized orbital in the EFP region.

              The QM/MM run might be RUNTYP=OPTIMIZE, etc.
          depending on what you want to do with the quantum atoms,
          and its $DATA group will contain both the 13 fully
          optimized atoms, and the 5 buffer atoms, and a basis set
          will exist on both sets of atoms.  The carbon atom in
          the buffer zone that borders the EFP region will have its
          nuclear charge set to 4 since now two bonding electrons
          to the EFP region are lost.  $VEC input will provide the
          six frozen orbitals in the buffer zone.  The EFP atoms are
          defined in a fragment potential group.
 
1

              The QM/MM run could use RHF or ROHF wavefunctions, to
          geometry optimize the locations of the quantum atoms (but
          not of course the frozen buffer zone or the EFP piece).  It
          could remove the proton to compute the proton affinity at
          that terminal nitrogen, hunt for transition states, and so
          on.  Presently the gradient for GVB and MCSCF is not quite
          right, so their use is discouraged.

              Input to control the QM/MM preparation is $TRUNCN and
          $MOFRZ groups.  There are a number of other parameters in
          various groups, namely QMMMBUF in $STONE, MOIDON and POLNUM
          in $LOCAL, NBUFFMO in $EFRAG, and INSORB in $GUESS that are
          relevant to this kind of computation.  For RUNTYP=MAKEFP,
          the biggest choices are LOCAL=RUEDENBRG vs. BOYS, and
          POLNUM in $LOCAL, otherwise this is pretty much a standard
          RUNTYP=ENERGY input file.

              Source code distributions of GAMESS contain a directory
          named ~/gamess/tools/efp, which has various tools for EFP
          manipulation in it, described in file readme.1st.  A full
          input file for the protonated lysine molecule is included,
          with instructions about how to proceed to the next steps.
          Tips on more specialized input possibilities are appended
          to the file readme.1st.


                         *** References ***
          
             The first of these is more descriptive, and the second 
          has a very detailed derivation of the method.  The 13th
          paper in the list is an overview article.
          
          1. "Effective fragment method for modeling intermolecular 
              hydrogen bonding effects on quantum mechanical 
              calculations"
              J.H.Jensen, P.N.Day, M.S.Gordon, H.Basch, D.Cohen, 
              D.R.Garmer, M.Krauss, W.J.Stevens in "Modeling the
              Hydrogen Bond" (D.A. Smith, ed.) ACS Symposium Series 
              569, 1994, pp 139-151.
          2. "An effective fragment method for modeling solvent
              effects in quantum mechanical calculations".
              P.N.Day, J.H.Jensen, M.S.Gordon, S.P.Webb,
              W.J.Stevens, M.Krauss, D.Garmer, H.Basch, D.Cohen
              J.Chem.Phys. 105, 1968-1986(1996).
          3. "The effective fragment model for solvation: internal
              rotation in formamide"
              W.Chen, M.S.Gordon, J.Chem.Phys., 105, 11081-90(1996)
          4. "Transphosphorylation catalyzed by ribonuclease A: 
              Computational study using ab initio EFPs"
              B.D.Wladkowski, M. Krauss, W.J.Stevens,
              J.Am.Chem.Soc. 117, 10537-10545(1995).
          5. "A study of aqueous glutamic acid using the effective
              fragment potential model"
              P.N.Day, R.Pachter  J.Chem.Phys. 107, 2990-9(1997)
          6. "Solvation and the excited states of formamide"
              M.Krauss, S.P.Webb  J.Chem.Phys. 107, 5771-5(1997)

1

          7. "Study of small water clusters using the effective
              fragment potential method"
              G.N.Merrill, M.S.Gordon  J.Phys.Chem.A 102, 2650-7(1998)
          8. "Solvation of the Menshutkin Reaction: A Rigourous
              test of the Effective Fragement Model"
              S.P.Webb, M.S.Gordon  J.Phys.Chem.A  103, 1265-73(1999)
          9. "Solvation of Sodium Chloride: EFP study of NaCl(H2O)n"
              C.P.Petersen, M.S.Gordon  J.Phys.Chem.A 103, 4162-6(1999)
         10. "QM/MM boundaries across covalent bonds: a frozen LMO based
              approach for the Effective Fragment Potential method"
              V.Kairys, J.H.Jensen  J.Phys.Chem.A  104, 6656-65(2000)
         11. "A study of water clusters using the effective fragment
              potential and Monte Carlo simulated annealing"
              P.N.Day, R.Pachter, M.S.Gordon, G.N.Merrill
              J.Chem.Phys. 112, 2063-73(2000)
         12. "A combined discrete/continuum solvation model:
              Application to glycine"  P.Bandyopadhyay, M.S.Gordon
              J.Chem.Phys. 113, 1104-9(2000)
         13. "The Effective Fragment Potential Method: a QM-based MM
              approach to modeling environmental effects in chemistry"
              M.S.Gordon, M.A.Freitag, P.Bandyopadhyay, J.H.Jensen,
              V.Kairys, W.J.Stevens  J.Phys.Chem.A  105, 293-307(2001)
         14. "Accurate Intraprotein Electrostatics derived from first
              principles: EFP study of proton affinities of lysine 55
              and tyrosine 20 in Turkey Ovomucoid"  R.M.Minikis,
              V.Kairys, J.H.Jensen  J.Phys.Chem.A 105, 3829-3837(2001)
         15. "Active site structure and mechanism of Human Glyoxalase I"
              U.RIchter, M.Krauss  J.Am.Chem.Soc.  123, 6973-6982(2001)
         16. "Solvent effect on the global and atomic DFT-based
              reactivity descriptors using the EFP model. Solvation 
              of ammonia."  R.Balawender, B.Safi, P.Geerlings
              J.Phys.Chem.A  105, 6703-6710(2001)
         17. "Intermolecular exchange-induction and charge transfer:
              Derivation of approximate formulas using nonorthogonal
              localized molecular orbitals."
              J.H.Jensen J.Chem.Phys. 114, 8775-8783(2001)
         18. "An integrated effective fragment-polarizable continuum
              approach to solvation: Theory and application to glycine"
              P.Banyopadhyay, M.S.Gordon, B.Mennucci, J.Tomasi
              J.Chem.Phys. 116, 5023-5032(2002)

1

                      MOPAC calculations within GAMESS
                      ----- ------------ ------ ------
 
              Parts of MOPAC 6.0 have been included in GAMESS so
          that the GAMESS user has access to three semiempirical
          wavefunctions:  MNDO, AM1 and PM3.  These wavefunctions
          are quantum mechanical in nature but neglect most two
          electron integrals, a deficiency that is (hopefully)
          compensated for by introduction of empirical parameters.
          The quantum mechanical nature of semiempirical theory
          makes it quite compatible with the ab initio methodology
          in GAMESS.  As a result, very little of MOPAC 6.0 actually
          is incorporated into GAMESS.  The part that did make it in
          is the code that evaluates
 
                1) the one- and two-electron integrals,
                2) the two-electron part of the Fock matrix,
                3) the cartesian energy derivatives, and
                4) the ZDO atomic charges and molecular dipole.
 
              Everything else is actually GAMESS:  coordinate input
          (including point group symmetry), the SCF convergence
          procedures, the matrix diagonalizer, the geometry
          searcher, the numerical hessian driver, and so on.  Most
          of the output will look like an ab initio output.
 
              It is extremely simple to perform one of these
          calculations.  All you need to do is specify GBASIS=MNDO,
          AM1, or PM3 in the $BASIS group.  Note that this not only
          picks a particular Slater orbital basis, it also selects a
          particular "hamiltonian", namely a particular parameter
          set.
 
              MNDO, AM1, and PM3 will not work with every option in
          GAMESS.  Currently the semiempirical wavefunctions support
          SCFTYP=RHF, UHF, and ROHF in any combination with
          RUNTYP=ENERGY, GRADIENT, OPTIMIZE, SADPOINT, HESSIAN, and
          IRC.  Note that all hessian runs are numerical finite
          differencing.  The MOPAC CI and half electron methods are
          not supported.
 
              Because the majority of the implementation is GAMESS
          rather than MOPAC you will notice a few improvments.
          Dynamic memory allocation is used, so that GAMESS uses far
          less memory for a given size of molecule.  The starting
          orbitals for SCF calculations are generated by a Huckel
          initial guess routine.  Spin restricted (high spin) ROHF
          can be performed.  Converged SCF orbitals will be labeled
          by their symmetry type.  Numerical hessians will make use
          of point group symmetry, so that only the symmetry unique
          atoms need to be displaced.  Infrared intensities will be
          calculated at the end of hessian runs.  We have not at
          present used the block diagonalizer during intermediate
          SCF iterations, so that the run time for a single geometry
          point in GAMESS is usually longer than in MOPAC.  However,
          the geometry optimizer in GAMESS can frequently optimize
          the structure in fewer steps than the procedure in MOPAC.
 
1
 
          Orbitals and hessians are punched out for convenient reuse
          in subsequent calculations.  Your molecular orbitals can
          be drawn with the PLTORB graphics program, which has been
          taught about s and p STO basis sets.
 
              However, because of the STO basis set used in semi-
          empirical runs, the various property calculations coded for
          Gaussian basis sets are unavailable.  This means $ELMOM,
          $ELPOT, etc. properties are unavailable.  Likewise the
          solvation models do not work with semi-empirical runs.
          Note that MOPAC6 did not include d STO functions, and it
          is therefore quite impossible to run transition metals.
 
              To reduce CPU time, only the EXTRAP convergence
          accelerator is used by the SCF procdures.  For difficult
          cases, the DIIS, RSTRCT, and/or SHIFT options will work,
          but may add significantly to the run time.  With the
          Huckel guess, most calculations will converge acceptably
          without these special options.
 
              MOPAC parameters exist for the following elements.
          The quote means that these elements are treated as
          "sparkles" rather than as atoms with genuine basis
          functions.  For MNDO:
 
           H
          Li  *          B  C  N  O  F
          Na' *         Al Si  P  S Cl
           K' * ...  Zn  * Ge  *  * Br
          Rb' * ...   *  * Sn  *  *  I
          *   * ...  Hg  * Pb  *
 
                   For AM1:                         For PM3:
           H                               H
           *  *          B  C  N  O  F     *  Be         *  C  N  O  F
          Na' *         Al Si  P  S Cl    Na' Mg        Al Si  P  S Cl
           K' * ...  Zn  * Ge  *  * Br     K' * ...  Zn Ga Ge As Se Br
          Rb' * ...   *  * Sn  *  *  I    Rb' * ...  Cd In Sn Sb Te  I
          *   * ...  Hg  *  *  *          *   * ...  Hg Tl Pb Bi
 
              Semiempirical calculations are very fast.  One of the
          motives for the MOPAC implementation within GAMESS is to
          take advantage of this speed.  Semiempirical models can
          rapidly provide reasonable starting geometries for ab
          initio optimizations.  Semiempirical hessian matrices are
          obtained at virtually no computational cost, and may help
          dramatically with an ab initio geometry optimization.
          Simply use HESS=READ in $STATPT to use a MOPAC $HESS group
          in an ab initio run.
 
              It is important to exercise caution as semiempirical
          methods can be dead wrong!  The reasons for this are bad
          parameters (in certain chemical situations), and the
          underlying minimal basis set.  A good question to ask
          before using MNDO, AM1 or PM3 is "how well is my system
          modeled with an ab initio minimal basis sets, such as
          STO-3G?" If the answer is "not very well" there is a good
          chance that a semiempirical description is equally poor.
 
1
 
                              Molecular Properties
                              --------- ----------
 
          These two papers are of general interest:
          A.D.Buckingham, J.Chem.Phys. 30, 1580-1585(1959).
          D.Neumann, J.W.Moskowitz J.Chem.Phys. 49, 2056-2070(1968).
 
          All units are derived from the atomic units for distance
          and the monopole electric charge, as given below.
 
          distance               - 1 au = 5.291771E-09 cm
 
          monopole               - 1 au = 4.803242E-10 esu
                                  1 esu = sqrt(g-cm**3)/sec
 
          dipole                 - 1 au = 2.541766E-18 esu-cm
                                1 Debye = 1.0E-18 esu-cm
 
          quadrupole             - 1 au = 1.345044E-26 esu-cm**2
                           1 Buckingham = 1.0E-26 esu-cm**2
 
          octopole               - 1 au = 7.117668E-35 esu-cm**3
 
          electric potential     - 1 au = 9.076814E-02 esu/cm
 
          electric field         - 1 au = 1.715270E+07 esu/cm**2
                            1 esu/cm**2 = 1 dyne/esu
 
          electric field gradient- 1 au = 3.241390E+15 esu/cm**3
 
          The atomic unit for electron density is electron/bohr**3
          for the total density, and 1/bohr**3 for an orbital
          density.
 
          The atomic unit for spin density is excess alpha spins per
          unit volume, h/4*pi*bohr**3.  Only the expectation value
          is computed, with no constants premultiplying it.
 
          IR intensities are printed in Debye**2/amu-Angstrom**2.
          These can be converted into intensities as defined by
          Wilson, Decius, and Cross's equation 7.9.25, in km/mole,
          by multiplying by 42.255.  If you prefer 1/atm-cm**2, use
          a conversion factor of 171.65 instead.  A good reference
          for deciphering these units is A.Komornicki, R.L.Jaffe
          J.Chem.Phys. 1979, 71, 2150-2155.  A reference showing
          how IR intensities change with basis improvements at the
          HF level is Y.Yamaguchi, M.Frisch, J.Gaw, H.F.Schaefer,
          J.S.Binkley, J.Chem.Phys. 1986, 84, 2262-2278.  

          Raman intensities in A**4/amu multiply by 6.0220E-09 for
          units of cm**4/g.
 
1
 
                               Localization tips
                               ------------ ----
 
              Three different orbital localization methods are
          implemented in GAMESS.  The energy and dipole based
          methods normally produce similar results, but see
          M.W.Schmidt, S.Yabushita, M.S.Gordon in J.Chem.Phys.,
          1984, 88, 382-389 for an interesting exception.  You can
          find references to the three methods at the beginning of
          this chapter.
 
              The method due to Edmiston and Ruedenberg works by
          maximizing the sum of the orbitals' two electron self
          repulsion integrals.  Most people who think about the
          different localization criteria end up concluding that
          this one seems superior.  The method requires the two
          electron integrals, transformed into the molecular orbital
          basis.  Because only the integrals involving the orbitals
          to be localized are needed, the integral transformation is
          actually not very time consuming.
 
              The Boys method maximizes the sum of the distances
          between the orbital centroids, that is the difference in
          the orbital dipole moments.
 
              The population method due to Pipek and Mezey maximizes
          a certain sum of gross atomic Mulliken populations.  This
          procedure will not mix sigma and pi bonds, so you will not
          get localized banana bonds.  Hence it is rather easy to
          find cases where this method give different results than
          the Ruedenberg or Boys approach.
 
              GAMESS will localize orbitals for any kind of RHF, UHF,
          ROHF, or MCSCF wavefunctions.  The localizations will
          automatically restrict any rotation that would cause the
          energy of the wavefunction to be changed (the total
          wavefunction is left invariant).  As discussed below,
          localizations for GVB or CI functions are not permitted.
 
              The default is to freeze core orbitals.  The localized
          valence orbitals are scarcely changed if the core orbitals
          are included, and it is usually convenient to leave them
          out.  Therefore, the default localizations are:  RHF
          functions localize all doubly occupied valence orbitals.
          UHF functions localize all valence alpha, and then all
          valence beta orbitals.  ROHF functions localize all valence
          doubly occupied orbitals, and all singly occupied orbitals, 
          but do not mix these two orbital spaces.  MCSCF functions
          localize all valence MCC type orbitals, and localize all
          active orbitals, but do not mix these two orbital spaces.
          To recover the invariant MCSCF function, you must be using
          a FORS=.TRUE. wavefunction, and you must set GROUP=C1 in
          $DRT, since the localized orbitals possess no symmetry.
 
1
 
              In general, GVB functions are invariant only to
          localizations of the NCO doubly occupied orbitals.  Any
          pairs must be written in natural form, so pair orbitals
          cannot be localized.  The open shells may be degenerate, so
          in general these should not be mixed.  If for some reason
          you feel you must localize the doubly occupied space, do a
          RUNTYP=PROP job.  Feed in the GVB orbitals, but tell the
          program it is SCFTYP=RHF, and enter a negative ICHARG so
          that GAMESS thinks all orbitals occupied in the GVB are
          occupied in this fictitous RHF.  Use NINA or NOUTA to
          localize the desired doubly occupied orbitals.  Orbital
          localization is not permitted for CI, because we cannot
          imagine why you would want to do that anyway.
 
              Boys localization of the core orbitals in molecules
          having elements from the third or higher row almost never
          succeeds.  Boys localization including the core for second
          row atoms will often work, since there is only one inner
          shell on these.  The Ruedenberg method should work for any
          element, although including core orbitals in the integral
          transformation is more expensive.
 
              The easiest way to do localization is in the run which
          generates the wavefunction, by selecting LOCAL=xxx in the
          $CONTRL group.  However, localization may be conveniently
          done at any time after determination of the wavefunction,
          by executing a RUNTYP=PROP job.  This will require only
          $CONTRL, $BASIS/$DATA, $GUESS (pick MOREAD), the converged
          $VEC, possibly $SCF or $DRT to define your wavefunction,
          and optionally some $LOCAL input.
 
              There is an option to restrict all rotations that would
          mix orbitals of different symmetries.  SYMLOC=.TRUE. yields
          only partially localized orbitals, but these still possess
          symmetry.  They are therefore very useful as starting
          orbitals for MCSCF or GVB-PP calculations.  Because they
          still have symmetry, these partially localized orbitals run
          as efficiently as the canonical orbitals.  Because it is
          much easier for a user to pick out the bonds which are to
          be correlated, a significant number of iterations can be
          saved, and convergence to false solutions is less likely.

                                    * * *
          
              The most important reason for localizing orbitals is
          to analyze the wavefunction.  A simple example is to make
          plots of the orbitals with either the MacMolPlt or PLTORB
          graphics codes, or perhaps to read the localized orbitals
          in during a RUNTYP=PROP job to examine their Mulliken
          populations.

1

              Localized orbitals are a particularly interesting way
          to analyze MCSCF computations.  The localized orbitals may
          be oriented on each atom (see option ORIENT in $LOCAL) to
          direct the orbitals on each atom towards their neighbors
          for maximal bonding, and then print a bond order analysis.
          The orientation procedure is newly programmed by J.Ivanic
          and K.Ruedenberg, to deal with the situation of more than
          one localized orbital occuring on any given atom.  Some
          examples of this type of analysis are
              D.F.Feller, M.W.Schmidt, K.Ruedenberg
                 J.Am.Chem.Soc.  104, 960-967 (1982)
              T.R.Cundari, M.S.Gordon
                 J.Am.Chem.Soc.  113, 5231-5243 (1991)
              N.Matsunaga, T.R.Cundari, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
                 Theoret.Chim.Acta  83, 57-68 (1992).

              In addition, the energy of your molecule can be 
          partitioned over the localized orbitals so that you may
          be able to understand the origin of barriers, etc.  This
          analysis can be made for the SCF energy, and also the MP2
          correction to the SCF energy, which requires two separate
          runs.  An explanation of the method, and application to
          hydrogen bonding may be found in J.H.Jensen, M.S.Gordon,
          J.Phys.Chem. 99, 8091-8107(1995).

              Analysis of the SCF energy is based on the localized
          charge distribution (LCD) model: W.England and M.S.Gordon,
          J.Am.Chem.Soc. 93, 4649-4657 (1971).  This is implemented
          for RHF and ROHF wavefunctions, and it requires use of 
          the Ruedenberg localization method, since it needs the
          two electron integrals to correctly compute energy sums.
          All orbitals must be included in the localization, even
          the cores, so that the total energy is reproduced.

              The LCD requires both electronic and nuclear charges
          to be partitioned.  The orbital localization automatically
          accomplishes the former, but division of the nuclear
          charge may require some assistance from you.  The program
          attempts to correctly partition the nuclear charge, if you
          select the MOIDON option, according to the following: a 
          Mulliken type analysis of the localized orbitals is made.
          This determines if an orbital is a core, lone pair, or 
          bonding MO.  Two protons are assigned to the nucleus to 
          which any core or lone pair belongs.  One proton is 
          assigned to each of the two nuclei in a bond.  When all 
          localized orbitals have been assigned in this manner, the 
          total number of protons which have been assigned to each 
          nucleus should equal the true nuclear charge.

              Many interesting systems (three center bonds, back-
          bonding, aromatic delocalization, and all charged species)
          may require you to assist the automatic assignment of
          nuclear charge.  First, note that MOIDON reorders the
          localized orbitals into a consistent order: first comes
          any core and lone pair orbitals on the 1st atom, then
          any bonds from atom 1 to atoms 2, 3, ..., then any core

1

          and lone pairs on atom 2, then any bonds from atom 2 to
          3, 4, ..., and so on.  Let us consider a simple case 
          where MOIDON fails, the ion NH4+.  Assuming the nitrogen
          is the 1st atom, MOIDON generates
               NNUCMO=1,2,2,2,2
                 MOIJ=1,1,1,1,1
                        2,3,4,5
                  ZIJ=2.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,
                          1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0
          The columns (which are LMOs) are allowed to span up to 5 
          rows (the nuclei), in situations with multicenter bonds.
          MOIJ shows the Mulliken analysis thinks there are four
          NH bonds following the nitrogen core.  ZIJ shows that
          since each such bond assigns one proton to nitrogen, the
          total charge of N is +6.  This is incorrect of course,
          as indeed will always happen to some nucleus in a charged
          molecule.  In order for the energy analysis to correctly
          reproduce the total energy, we must ensure that the 
          charge of nitrogen is +7.  The least arbitrary way to
          do this is to increase the nitrogen charge assigned to
          each NH bond by 1/4.  Since in our case NNUCMO and MOIJ
          and much of ZIJ are correct, we need only override a
          small part of them with $LOCAL input:
                 IJMO(1)=1,2,  1,3,  1,4,  1,5
                 ZIJ(1)=1.25, 1.25, 1.25, 1.25
          which changes the charge of the first atom of orbitals 
          2 through 5 to 5/4, changing ZIJ to
                  ZIJ=2.0,1.25,1.25,1.25,1.25,
                          1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
          The purpose of the IJMO sparse matrix pointer is to let
          you give only the changed parts of ZIJ and/or MOIJ.

              Another way to resolve the problem with NH4+ is to
          change one of the 4 equivalent bond pairs into a "proton".  
          A "proton" orbital AH treats the LMO as if it were a
          lone pair on A, and so assigns +2 to nucleus A.  Use of
          a "proton" also generates an imaginary orbital, with
          zero electron occupancy.  For example, if we make atom
          2 in NH4+ a "proton", by
               IPROT(1)=2
               NNUCMO(2)=1
               IJMO(1)=1,2,2,2   MOIJ(1)=1,0   ZIJ(1)=2.0,0.0
          the automatic decomposition of the nuclear charges will be
               NNUCMO=1,1,2,2,2,1
                 MOIJ=1,1,1,1,1,2
                          3,4,5
                  ZIJ=2.0,2.0,1.0,1.0,1.0,1.0
                              1.0,1.0,1.0
          The 6th column is just a proton, and the decomposition
          will not give any electronic energy associated with
          this "orbital", since it is vacant.  Note that the two ways
          we have disected the nuclear charges for NH4+ will both
          yield the correct total energy, but will give very
          different individual orbital components.  Most people
          will feel that the first assignment is the least arbitrary,
          since it treats all four NH bonds equivalently.
 
1

              However you assign the nuclear charges, you must
          ensure that the sum of all nuclear charges is correct.
          This is most easily verified by checking that the energy
          sum equals the total SCF energy of your system.  
 
              As another example, H3PO is studied in EXAM26.INP.
          Here the MOIDON analysis decides the three equivalent
          orbitals on oxygen are O lone pairs, assigning +2 to
          the oxygen nucleus for each orbital.  This gives Z(O)=9,
          and Z(P)=14.  The least arbitrary way to reduce Z(O)
          and increase Z(P) is to recognize that there is some
          backbonding in these "lone pairs" to P, and instead 
          assign the nuclear charge of these three orbitals by
          1/3 to P, 5/3 to O.

              Because you may have to make several runs, looking
          carefully at the localized orbital output before the
          correct nuclear assignments are made, there is an 
          option to skip directly to the decomposition when the
          orbital localization has already been done.  Use
             $CONTRL RUNTYP=PROP
             $GUESS  GUESS=MOREAD  NORB=
             $VEC containing the localized orbitals!
             $TWOEI
          The latter group contains the necessary Coulomb and
          exchange integrals, which are punched by the first
          localization, and permits the decomposition to begin
          immediately.

              SCF level dipoles can also be analyzed using the
          DIPDCM flag in $LOCAL.  The theory of the dipole 
          analysis is given in the third paper of the LCD
          sequence.  The following list includes application of
          the LCD analysis to many problems of chemical interest:

          W.England, M.S.Gordon  J.Am.Chem.Soc. 93, 4649-4657 (1971)
          W.England, M.S.Gordon  J.Am.Chem.Soc. 94, 4818-4823 (1972)
          M.S.Gordon, W.England  J.Am.Chem.Soc. 94, 5168-5178 (1972)
          M.S.Gordon, W.England  Chem.Phys.Lett. 15, 59-64 (1972)
          M.S.Gordon, W.England  J.Am.Chem.Soc. 95, 1753-1760 (1973)
          M.S.Gordon             J.Mol.Struct. 23, 399 (1974)
          W.England, M.S.Gordon, K.Ruedenberg,
                                 Theoret.Chim.Acta 37, 177-216 (1975)
          J.H.Jensen, M.S.Gordon, J.Phys.Chem. 99, 8091-8107(1995)
          J.H.Jensen, M.S.Gordon, J.Am.Chem.Soc. 117, 8159-8170(1995)
          M.S.Gordon, J.H.Jensen, Acc.Chem.Res. 29, 536-543(1996)

1

                                 * * *

              It is also possible to analyze the MP2 correlation
          correction in terms of localized orbitals, for the RHF
          case.  The method is that of G.Peterssen and M.L.Al-Laham,
          J.Chem.Phys., 94, 6081-6090 (1991).  Any type of localized
          orbital may be used, and because the MP2 calculation
          typically omits cores, the $LOCAL group will normally 
          include only valence orbitals in the localization.  As
          mentioned already, the analysis of the MP2 correction must 
          be done in a separate run from the SCF analysis, which must
          include cores in order to sum up to the total SCF energy.

                                 * * *

              Typically, the results are most easily interpreted
          by looking at "the bigger picture" than at "the details".
          Plots of kinetic and potential energy, normally as a
          function of some coordinate such as distance along an
          IRC, are the most revealing.  Once you determine, for
          example, that the most significant contribution to the
          total energy is the kinetic energy, you may wish to look
          further into the minutia, such as the kinetic energies
          of individual localized orbitals, or groups of LMOs
          corresponding to an entire functional group.

1
 
                  Transition Moments and Spin-Orbit Coupling
                  ---------- ------- --- ---------- --------
 
          A review of various ways of computing spin-orbit coupling:
              D.G.Fedorov, S.Koseki, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon,
              Int.Rev.Phys.Chem. 22, 551-592(2003)
 
              GAMESS can compute transition moments and oscillator
          strengths for the radiative transitions between states
          written in terms of CI wavefunctions (GUGA only).  The
          moments are computed using both the "length (dipole) form"
          and "velocity form".  The two values will be slightly
          different as the CI wavefunction does not exactly satisfy 
          the Hellmann-Feynman theorem.  This basic computation is 
          OPERAT=DM in $TRANST.  For transition moments, the CI is
          necessarily performed on states of the same multiplicity.  

              All other operators are various spin-orbit coupling
          options.  There are two kinds of calculations possible,
          which we will call SO-CI and SO-MCQDPT.  Note that there
          is a hyphen in "spin-orbit CI" to avoid confusion with
          "second order CI" in the sense of the SOCI keyword in $DRT
          input.  For SO-CI, the initial states may be any CI wave-
          function that the GUGA package can generate.  For SO-MCQDPT
          the initial states for spin-orbit coupling are of CAS type,
          and the operator mixing them corresponds to MCQDPT
          generalised for spin-dependent operators (with certain
          approximations).

              GAMESS can compute the "microscopic Breit-Pauli
          spin-orbit operator", which includes both a one and two
          electron operator.  The full Breit-Pauli operator can be
          computed exactly (OPERAT=HSO2), or approximated in two
          ways:  complete elimination of the 2e- term, whose absence
          can be approximately accounted for by means of effective
          nuclear charges (HSO1), or by inclusion of only the core-
          active 2e- terms which typically account for 90% or more
          of the two electron term, while saving most of the 2e- 
          terms' CPU cost (HSO2P).  

              Spin-orbit runs can be done for general spins, for
          more than two different spin multiplicities at once, for
          general active spaces.  At times, when the spatial wave-
          function is degenerate, a spin-orbit run may involve only
          one spin multiplicity, e.g. a triplet-pi state in a linear
          molecule.  The most common case is two different spins.
          It is also possible to obtain the dipole transition moments
          between the final spin-mixed wavefunctions, which of course
          do not any longer have a rigourous S quantum no.  When the
          run is SO-MCQDPT, the transition moment are first computed
          only between CAS states, and then combined with the spin-
          mixed SO-MCQDPT coefficients.  Compared to older versions,
          the basis set has been fully generalized to allow any s, p, 
          d, f, g, or L functions.

1

                          * * * * states * * * *

              For transition moments, the states are generated by
          CI calculations using the GUGA package.  These states are
          the final states, and the results are just the transition
          moments between these states.  The states are defined by
          $DRTx input groups.

              For SO-CI, the energy of the CI states forms the
          diagonal of a spin-orbit Hamiltonian, as in the state basis
          the spin-free Hamiltonian is of course diagonal.  Addition
          of the Pauli-Breit operator does not change the diagonal, 
          but does add H-so elements off diagonal.  For SO-MCQDPT,
          the spin-free MCQDPT matrix elements are expanded into
          matrices corresponding to all Ms values for a pair of
          multiplicities.  These matrices are block-diagonal before
          the addition of spin-orbit coupling terms, coupling Ms
          values.  The diagonalization of this spin-orbit Hamiltonian
          gives new energy levels, and spin-mixed final states.
          Optionally, the transition dipoles between the final states
          can be computed.  The input requirements are $DRTx or
          $MCQDx groups which define the original pure spin states.

              We will call the initial states CAS-CI, since most of
          the time they will be MCSCF states.  There may be cases
          such as the Na example below where SCF orbitals are used,
          or other cases where a FOCI or SOCI wavefunction might be
          used for the initial states.  Please keep in mind that the
          term does not imply the states must be MCSCF states, just
          that they commonly are.

              In the above, x may vary from 1 to 64.  The reason for
          allowing such a large range is to permit the use of Abelian
          point group symmetry during the generation of the initial
          states.  The best explanation will be an example, but the
          number of these input groups depends on both the number of
          orbital sets input, and how much symmetry is present.  The
          next two subsections discuss these points.

                          * * * * orbitals * * * *

              The orbitals for transition moments or for SO-CI can be
          one common set of orbitals used by all CI states.  If one
          set of orbitals is used, the transition moment or spin-
          orbit coupling can be found for any type of GUGA CI wave-
          function.  Alternatively, two sets of orbitals (obtained by
          separate MCSCF orbital optimizations) can be used.  Two or
          more separate CIs will be carried out.  The two MO sets
          must share a common set of frozen core orbitals, and the
          CI must be of the complete active space type.  These
          restrictions are needed to leave the CI wavefunctions
          invariant under the necessary rotation to corresponding
          orbitals.  The non-orthogonal procedure implemented is a
          GUGA driven equivalent to the method of Lengsfield, et al.
          Note that the FOCI and SOCI methods described by these
          workers are not available in GAMESS.

1
 
              If you would like to use separate orbitals during the
          CI, they may be generated with the FCORE option in $MCSCF.
          Typically you would optimize the ground state completely, 
          then use these MCSCF orbitals in an optimization of the
          excited state, under the constraint of FCORE=.TRUE.

              For SO-MCQDPT calculations, only one set of orbitals
          may be input to describe all CAS-CI states.  Typically that
          orbital set will be obtained by state-averaged MCSCF, see
          WSTATE in $DET/$DRT, and also in the $MCQDx input.  Note
          that although the RUNTYP=TRANSITN driver is tied to the
          GUGA CI package, there is no reason the orbitals cannot be
          obtained using the determinant CI package.  In fact, for
          the case of spin-orbit coupling, you might want to utilize
          the ability to state average over several spins, see PURES
          in $DET.
         
              If there is no molecular symmetry present, transition
          moment calculations will provide $DRT1 if there is one set
          of orbitals, otherwise $DRT1 defines the CI based on $VEC1
          and $DRT2 the CI based on $VEC2.  Also for the case of no
          symmetry, a spin-orbit job should enter one $DRTx or $MCQDx
          for every spin multiplicity, and all states of the same
          multiplicity have to be generated from $VEC1 or $VEC2,
          according to IVEX input.  

                         * * * * symmetry * * * *

              The CAS-CI states are most efficiently generated using
          symmetry, since states of different symmetry have zero
          Hamiltonian matrix elements.  It is probably more efficient
          to do four CI calculations in the group C2v on A1, A2, B1, 
          and B2 symmetry, than one CI with a combined Hamiltonian
          in C1 symmetry (unless the active space is very small), and
          similar remarks apply to the SO-MCQDPT case.  In order to
          avoid repeatedly saying $DRTx or $MCQDx, the following few
          paragraphs say $DRTx only.

              Again supposing the group is C2v, and you are interested
          in singlet-triplet coupling.  After some preliminary CI
          calculations, you might know that the lowest 8 states are
          two 1-a1, 1-b1, two 1-b2, one 3-a1, and two 3-b2 states.  
          In this case your input would consist of five $DRTx, of 
          which you can give the three singlets in any order but
          these must preceed the two triplet input groups to follow
          the rule of increasing multiplicity.  Clearly it is not
          possible to write a formula for how many $DRTx there will
          be, this depends not only on the point group, but also the
          chemistry of the situation.

              If you are using two sets of orbitals, the generation
          of the corresponding orbitals for the two sets will permute
          the active orbitals in an unpredictable way.  Use ISTSYM to
          define the desired state symmetry, rather than relying on
          the orbital order.  It is easy and safer to be explicit
          about the spatial orbital symmetry.

1

              The users are encouraged to specify full symmetry in
          their $DATA input even though they may choose to set the
          symmetry in $DRTx to C1.  The CI states will be labelled in
          the group given in $DATA.  The use of non-Abelian symmetry
          is limited by the absence of non-Abelian CI or MCQDPT.  In
          this case the users can choose between setting full non-
          Abelian symmetry in $DATA and C1 in $DRT or else an Abelian
          subgroup in both $DATA and $DRT.  The latter choice appears
          to be most efficient at present.  

              An example of SO-MCQDPT illustrating how the carbon
          atom which is actually Kh symmetry (full rotation-reflection
          group) can be entered in D2h, the highest Abelian group.
          The run time is considerably longer in C1 symmetry.

              As another example, consider an organic molecule with a
          singly excited state, where that state might be coupled to
          low or high spin, and where these two states might be close
          enough to have a strong spin-orbit coupling.  If it happens
          that the S1 and S0 states possess different symmetry, a
          very reaasonable calculation would be to treat the S1 and 
          T1 state with the same $VEC2 orbitals, leaving the ground
          state described by $VEC1.  After doing an MCSCF on the S0
          ground state for $VEC1, you could do a state-averaged MCSCF
          for $VEC2 optimized for T1 and S1 simultaneously, using
          PURES.  The spin orbit job would obtain its initial states
          from three GUGA CI computations, S0 from $VEC1 and $DRT1,
          S1 from $VEC2 and $DRT2, and T1 from $VEC2 and $DRT3.  Your
          $TRANST would be NUMCI=3, IROOTS(1)=1,1,1, IVEX(1)=1,2,2.
          Note that the second IROOTS value is 1 because S1 was
          presumed to have a different symmetry than S0, so ISTSYM in
          $DRT1 and $DRT2 will differ.  The calculation just outlined
          cannot be done if S0 and S1 have the same spatial symmetry,
          as IROOTS(1)=1,2,1 to obtain S1 during the second CI will
          bring in an additional S0 state (one expressed in terms of
          the $VEC2, at slightly higher energy).  This problem is the
          origin of the statement several paragraphs above that a 
          system with no symmetry will have one $DRTx for every spin
          multiplicity included. 

              For transition moments, which do not diagonalize a 
          matrix containing these duplicated states, it is OK to
          proceed, provided you ignore all transition moments between
          the same states obtained in the two different CIs.

                      * * * * spin orbit details * * * *

              Spin-orbit coupling is always performed in a quasi-
          degenerate perturbative manner.  Typically the states close
          in energy are included into the spin-orbit coupling matrix.
          "Close" has a easily understandable meaning, since in the
          limit of small coupling the quasi-degenerate treatment is
          reduced to a second order perturbative treatment, that is,
          the affect of a state upon the state of primary interest is

1

          given by the square of the spin-orbit coupling matrix
          element divided by the difference of the adibatic energies.
          This is useful to keep in mind when deciding how many CI
          states to include in the matrix.  The states that are
          included are treated in a fashion that is equivalent to
          infinite order perturbation theory (exact) whereas the
          states that are not included make no contribution. 

               The choice between HSO2 and HSO2FF is very often in
          favour of the former. HSO2 computes the matrix elements in
          CSF basis and then contracts them with CI coefficients,
          whereas HSO2FF uses a generalised density in AO basis
          computed for each pair of states, thus HSO2 is much more
          efficient in case of multiple states given in IROOTS.
          HSO2FF takes less memory for integral storage, thus it can
          be superior in case of small active spaces and large basis
          sets, in part because it does not store 2e SOC integrals on
          disk and secondly, it does not redundantly treat the same
          pair of determinants if they appear in different CSFs.  The
          numerical results with HSO2 and HSO2FF should be identical
          within machine and algorithmic accuracy.

              The spin-orbit operator contains a one electron term
          arising from Pauli's reduction of the hydrogenic Dirac
          equation to one-component form, and a two electron term
          added by Breit.  The only practical limitation on the
          computation of the Breit term is that HSO2FF is limited to
          10 active orbitals on 32 bit machines, and to about 26
          active orbitals on 64 bit machines.  The spin-orbit matrix
          elements vanish for |delta-S| > 1, but it is possible to
          include three or more spins in the computation.  Since
          singlets interact with triplets, and triplets interact
          with pentuplets, inclusion of S=0,1,2 simultaneously lets
          you pick up the indirect interaction between singlets and
          pentuplets that the intermediate triplets afford.
 
              As an approximation, the nuclear charge appearing in
          the one electron term can be regarded as an empirical scale
          factor, compensating for the omission of the two electron
          operator.  In addition, these effective charges are often
          used to compensate for missing nodes in valence orbitals
          of ECP runs, in which case the ZEFF are typically very far
          from the two nuclear charges.  ZEFTYP selects some built
          in values obtained by S.Koseki et al, but if you have some
          favorite parameters, they can be read in as the ZEFF input
          array.  Effective charges may be used for any OPERAT, but
          are most often used with HSO1.

              Various symmetries are used to avoid computing zero
          spin-orbit matrix elements.  NOSYM in $TRANST allows some 
          control over this: NOSYM=1 gives up point group symmetry
          completely, while 2 turns off additional symmetries such 
          as spin selection rules.  HSO1,2,2P compute all matrix

1

          elements in a group (i.e. between two $DRTx groups with
          fixed Ms(ket)-Ms(bra)) if at least one of them does not
          vanish by symmetry, and HSO2PP actually avoids computation
          for each pair of states if forbidden by symmetry.  Setting
          NOSYM=2 will cause HSO2FF to consider the elements between
          two singlets, which are always calculated for HSO1,2,2P
          when transition dipoles are requested as well.

              SYMTOL has a dramatic effect on the run speed.  This
          cutoff is applied to CSF coefficcients, their products,
          and these products times CSF orbital overlaps.  The value
          permits a tradeoff of accuracy for run time, and since the
          error in the spin-orbit properties approaches SYMTOL mainly
          for SOCI functions, it may be useful to increase SYMTOL to
          save time for CAS or FOCI functions.  Some experimenting
          will tell you what you can get away with.  SYMTOL is also
          used during CI state symmetry assignment, for NOIRR=-1
          in $DRT.

             In case if you do not provide enough storage for the
          form factors sorting then some extra disk space will be
          used;  the extra disk space can be eliminated if you set
          SAVDSK=.TRUE. (the amount of savings depends on the active
          space and memory provided, it some cases it can decrease
          the disk space up to one order of magnitude).  The form
          factors are in binary format, and so can be transfered
          between computers only if they have compatible binary
          files.  There is a built-in check for consistency of a
          restart file DAFL30 with the current run parameters.
 
                     * * * * input nitty-gritty * * * *
  
              The transition moment and spin-orbit coupling driver
          is a rather restricted path through the GUGA CI part of
          GAMESS.  Note that $GUESS is not read, instead the MOs will
          be MOREAD in a $VEC1 and perhaps a $VEC2 group.  It is not
          possible to reorder MOs.  For SO-CI,
 
          1) Give SCFTYP=NONE CITYP=GUGA MPLEVL=0.
          
          2) $CIINP is not read.  The CI is hardwired to consist
             of CI DRT generation, integral transformation/sorting,
             Hamiltonian generation, and diagonalization.  This
             means $DRT1 (and maybe $DRT2,...), $TRANS, $CISORT,
             $GUGEM, and $GUGDIA input is read, and acted upon.
 
          3) The density matrices are not generated, and so no
             properties (other than the transition moment or the
             spin-orbit coupling) are computed.
 
          4) There is no restart capability provided, except for
             saving some form-factor information.
 
          5) $DRT1, $DRT2, $DRT3, ... must go from lowest to highest
             multiplicity.
 
1

          6) IROOTS will determine the number of CI states in each
             CI for which the properties are calculated.  Use
             NSTATE to specify the number of CI states for the
             CI Hamiltonian diagonalisation.  Sometimes the CI
             convergence is assisted by requesting more roots
             to be found in the diagonalization than you want to
             include in the property calculation.

          For SO-MCQDPT, the steps are

          1) Give SCFTYP=NONE CITYP=NONE MPLEVL=2.
          
          2) the number of roots in each MCQDPT is controlled by
             $TRANST's IROOTS, and each such calculation is
             defined by $MCQD1, $MCQD2, ... input.  These must go
             from lowest multiplicity to highest.
 
1

                       * * * * references * * * *

          The review already mentioned:
          "Spin-orbit coupling in molecules: chemistry beyond the
           adiabatic approximation".
          D.G.Fedorov, S.Koseki, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon,
          Int.Rev.Phys.Chem. 22, 551-592(2003)

          Reference for separate active orbital optimization:
           1. B.H.Lengsfield, III,  J.A.Jafri,  D.H.Phillips,
              C.W.Bauschlicher, Jr.  J.Chem.Phys. 74,6849-6856(1981)

          References for transition moments:
           2. F.Weinhold, J.Chem.Phys. 54,1874-1881(1970)
           3. C.W.Bauschlicher, S.R.Langhoff
              Theoret.Chim.Acta 79:93-103(1991)
           4. "Intramediate Quantum Mechanics, 3rd Ed." Hans A.
              Bethe, Roman Jackiw   Benjamin/Cummings Publishing,
              Menlo Park, CA (1986), chapters 10 and 11.
           5. S.Koseki, M.S.Gordon  J.Mol.Spectrosc. 123, 392-404(1987)
 
          References for Zeff spin-orbit coupling, and ZEFTYP values:
           6. S.Koseki, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon  
              J.Phys.Chem.  96, 10768-10772 (1992)
           7. S.Koseki, M.S.Gordon, M.W.Schmidt, N.Matsunaga
              J.Phys.Chem.  99, 12764-12772 (1995)
           8. N.Matsunaga, S.Koseki, M.S.Gordon
              J.Chem.Phys.  104, 7988-7996 (1996)
           9. S.Koseki, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
              J.Phys.Chem.A  102, 10430-10435 (1998)
          10. S.Koseki, D.G.Fedorov, M.W.Schmidt, M.S.Gordon
              J.Phys.Chem.A  105, 8262-8268 (2001)

          References for full Breit-Pauli spin-orbit coupling:
          11. T.R.Furlani, H.F.King
              J.Chem.Phys.  82, 5577-5583 (1985)
          12. H.F.King, T.R.Furlani
              J.Comput.Chem.  9, 771-778 (1988)
          13. D.G.Fedorov, M.S.Gordon
              J.Chem.Phys. 112, 5611-5623 (2000)
          with the latter including information on the partial
          two electron operator method.

          Reference for SO-MCQDPT:
          14. D.G.Fedorov, J.P.Finley  Phys.Rev.A 64, 042502 (2001)

          Recent applications:
          15. D.G.Fedorov, M.Evans, Y.Song, M.S.Gordon, C.Y.Ng
              J.Chem.Phys. 111, 6413-6421 (1999)
          16. D.G.Fedorov, M.S.Gordon, Y.Song, C.Y.Ng
              J.Chem.Phys. 115, 7393-7400 (2001)
          17. B.J.Duke  J.Comput.Chem. 22, 1552-1556 (2001)

1

                                    * * *
 
              Special thanks to Bob Cave and Dave Feller for their
          assistance in performing check spin-orbit coupling runs
          with the MELDF programs.  Special thanks to Tom Furlani
          for contributing his 2e- spin-orbit code and answering
          many questions about its interface.  Special thanks to
          Haruyuki Nakano for explaining the spin functions used
          in the MCQDPT package.
 
              We end with 2 examples.  Note that you must know what
          you are doing with term symbols, J quantum numbers, point
          group symmetry, and so on in order to make skillful use of
          this part of the program.  Seeing your final degeneracies
          turn out like a text book says it should is beautiful!
 
          !  Compute the splitting of the famous sodium D line.
          !
          !  The two SCF energies below give an excitation energy
          !  of 16,044 cm-1 to the 2-P term.  The computed spin-orbit
          !  levels are at RELATIVE E=-10.269 and 5.135 cm-1, which
          !  means the 2-P level interval is 15.404 cm-1.
          !
          !  Charlotte Moore's Atomic Energy Levels, volume 1, gives
          !  the experimental 2-P interval as 17.1963, the levels are
          !  at 2-S-1/2= 0.0, 2-P-1/2= 16,956.183, 2-P-3/2= 16,973.379
          
          1. generate ground state 2-S orbitals by conventional ROHF.
             the energy of the ground state is -161.8413919816
          --- $contrl scftyp=rohf mult=2 $end
          --- $system kdiag=3 memory=300000 $end
          --- $guess  guess=huckel $end
 
          2. generate excited state 2-P orbitals, using a state-averaged
             SCF wavefunction to ensure radial degeneracy of the 3p shell
             is preserved.  The open shell SCF energy is -161.7682895801.
             The computation is both spin and space restricted open shell
             SCF on the 2-P Russell-Saunders term.  Starting orbitals are
             reordered orbitals from step 1.
          --- $contrl scftyp=gvb mult=2 $end
          --- $system kdiag=3 memory=300000 $end
          --- $guess  guess=moread norb=13 norder=1 iorder(6)=7,8,9,6 $end
          --- $scf    nco=5 nseto=1 no(1)=3 rstrct=.true. couple=.true.
          ---             f(1)=  1.0  0.16666666666667
          ---         alpha(1)=  2.0  0.33333333333333  0.0
          ---          beta(1)= -1.0 -0.16666666666667  0.0 $end

1
          
          3. compute spin-orbit coupling in the 2-P term.  The use of
             C1 symmetry in $DRT1 ensures that all three spatial CSFs
             are kept in the CI function.  In the preliminary CI, the 
             spin function is just the alpha spin doublet, and all three 
             roots should be degenerate, and furthermore equal to the 
             GVB energy at step 2.  The spin-orbit coupling code uses
             both doublet spin functions with each of the three spatial
             wavefunctions, so the spin-orbit Hamiltonian is a 6x6 matrix.  
             The two lowest roots of the full 6x6 spin-orbit Hamiltonian 
             are the doubly degenerate 2-P-1/2 level, while the other 
             four roots are the degenerate 2-P-3/2 level.
             
           $contrl scftyp=none cityp=guga runtyp=transitn mult=2 $end
           $system memory=2000000 $end
           $basis  gbasis=n31 ngauss=6 $end
           $gugdia nstate=3 $end
           $transt operat=hso1 numvec=1 numci=1 nfzc=5 nocc=8 
                   iroots=3 zeff=10.04 $end
           $drt1   group=c1 fors=.true. nfzc=5 nalp=1 nval=2 $end

           $data
          Na atom...2-P excited state...6-31G basis
          Dnh 2
          
          Na 11.0
           $end
                 
          --- GVB ORBITALS --- GENERATED AT  7:46:08 CST 30-MAY-1996
          Na atom...2-P excited state
          E(GVB)=     -161.7682895801, E(NUC)=     .0000000000,    5 ITERS
           $VEC1
           1  1 9.97912679E-01 8.83038094E-03 0.00000000E+00...
                ... orbitals from step 2 go here ...
          13  3-1.10674398E+00 0.00000000E+00 0.00000000E+00
           $END


             As an example of both SO-MCQDPT, and the use of as much
          symmetry as possible, consider carbon.  The CAS-CI uses
          an active space of 2s,2p,3s,3p orbitals, and the spin-orbit
          job includes all terms from the lowest configuration,
          2s2,2p2.  These terms are 3-P, 1-D, and 1-S.  If you look
          at table 58 in Herzberg's book on electronic spectra, you
          will be able to see how the Kh spatial irreps P, D, S are
          partitioned into the D2h irreps input below.

          !   C SO-MRMP on all levels in the s**2,p**2 configuration.
          !
          !  levels        CAS         and     MCQDPT
          !   1           .0000                 .0000 cm-1      3-P-0
          !   2-4       12.6879-12.8469       13.2721-13.2722   3-P-1
          !   5-9       37.8469-37.8470       39.5638-39.5639   3-P-2
          !  10-14   12169.1275            10251.7910           1-D-2
          !  15      19264.4221            21111.5130           1-S-0
          !

1

          !   The active space consists of (2s,2p,3s,3p) with 4 e-.
          !   D2h symmetry speeds up the calculation considerably,
          !   on the same computer D2h = 78 and C1 = 424 seconds.
           $contrl scftyp=none cityp=none mplevl=2 runtyp=transitn $end
           $system memory=5000000 $end
          !
          !            below is input to run in C1 subgroup
          !
          --- $transt operat=hso2 numvec=-2 numci=2 nfzc=1 nocc=9
          ---         iroots(1)=6,3 parmp=3
          ---         ivex(1)=1,1 $end
          --- $MCQD1  nosym=1 nstate=6 mult=1 INORB=1 iforb=3 
          ---         nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8
          ---         wstate(1)=1,1,1,1,1,1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
          --- $MCQD2  nosym=1 nstate=3 mult=3 INORB=1 iforb=3 
          ---         nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8
          ---         wstate(1)=1,1,1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
          !
          !            below is input to run in D2h subgroup
          !
           $transt operat=hso2 numvec=-7 numci=7 nfzc=1 nocc=9
                   iroots(1)=3,1,1,1, 1,1,1   parmp=3
                   ivex(1)=1,1,1,1,1,1,1 $end
           $MCQD1  nosym=-1 mult=1 INORB=1 iforb=3 
                   nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8 
                   istsym=1 wstate(1)=1,1,1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
           $MCQD2  nosym=-1 mult=1 INORB=1 iforb=3 
                   nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8 
                   istsym=2 wstate(1)=1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
           $MCQD3  nosym=-1 mult=1 INORB=1 iforb=3 
                   nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8 
                   istsym=3 wstate(1)=1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
           $MCQD4  nosym=-1 mult=1 INORB=1 iforb=3 
                   nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8 
                   istsym=4 wstate(1)=1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
           $MCQD5  nosym=-1 mult=3 INORB=1 iforb=3 
                   nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8 
                   istsym=2 wstate(1)=1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
           $MCQD6  nosym=-1 mult=3 INORB=1 iforb=3 
                   nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8 
                   istsym=3 wstate(1)=1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
           $MCQD7  nosym=-1 mult=3 INORB=1 iforb=3 
                   nmofzc=1 nmodoc=0 nmoact=8 
                   istsym=4 wstate(1)=1 thrcon=1e-8 thrgen=1e-10 $END
          !
          !     input  to prepare the 3-P ground state orbitals
          !     great care is taken to create symmetry equivalent p's
          !
          --- $contrl scftyp=mcscf cityp=none mplevl=0
          ---         runtyp=energy mult=3 $end
          --- $guess  guess=moread norb=55 purify=.t. $end 
          --- $mcscf  cistep=guga fullnr=.t. $end
          --- $drt    group=c1 fors=.true. nmcc=1 ndoc=1 nalp=2 nval=5 $end
          --- $gugdia nstate=9 maxdia=1000 $end
          --- $gugdm2 wstate(1)=1,1,1 $end
          !

1

           $data
          C...aug-cc-pvtz (10s,5p,2d,1f) -> [4s,3p,2d,1f] (1s,1p,1d,1f)
          Dnh 2
          
          C 6.0
           S   8
            1        8236.000000         0.5310000000E-03
            2        1235.000000         0.4108000000E-02
            3        280.8000000         0.2108700000E-01
            4        79.27000000         0.8185300000E-01
            5        25.59000000         0.2348170000
            6        8.997000000         0.4344010000
            7        3.319000000         0.3461290000
            8       0.3643000000        -0.8983000000E-02
           S   8
            1        8236.000000        -0.1130000000E-03
            2        1235.000000        -0.8780000000E-03
            3        280.8000000        -0.4540000000E-02
            4        79.27000000        -0.1813300000E-01
            5        25.59000000        -0.5576000000E-01
            6        8.997000000        -0.1268950000
            7        3.319000000        -0.1703520000
            8       0.3643000000         0.5986840000
           S   1
            1       0.9059000000          1.000000000
           S   1
            1       0.1285000000          1.000000000
           P   3
            1        18.71000000         0.1403100000E-01
            2        4.133000000         0.8686600000E-01
            3        1.200000000         0.2902160000
           P   1
            1       0.3827000000          1.000000000
           P   1
            1       0.1209000000          1.000000000
           D   1
            1        1.097000000          1.000000000
           D   1
            1       0.3180000000          1.000000000
           F   1
            1       0.7610000000          1.000000000
           S   1
            1       0.440200000E-01      1.00000000
           P   1
            1       0.356900000E-01      1.00000000
           D   1
            1       0.100000000          1.00000000
           F   1
            1       0.268000000          1.00000000
          
           $end
          --- OPTIMIZED MCSCF MO-S --- GENERATED 22-AUG-2000
          E(MCSCF)=      -37.7282408589, 11 ITERS
           $VEC1  
           1  1 9.75511467E-01 ...
           $END